You are on page 1of 383

User Guide

STanalyser
Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB

9836 5228 01
2014-03
Edition 4.5
STanalyser User Guide Revision history

Revision history
Edition Date Author Description Minimum Ref.
Reference Firmware
Software version
(TT BLM)
version
1.0 23 December 2010 M. Grippa First issue for DEMO KIT 4.0.x 2.0x

2.0 15 February 2011 M. Grippa Added Tool Crib T version 5.0.x 2.0x

2.1 6 May 2011 M. Grippa Added Tool Crib T/A version,


added connection to Torque 6.0.x 3.0x
Supervisor (par. 16)

3.0 3 October 2011 M. Grippa Added Production and


Residual (par. 1) versions
and all related new 7.1.x 4.1x
functions, general manual
update.

3.1 10 February 2012 M. Grippa Added communication


between STanalyser
Residual and Torque
Supervisor, added IRC-W
radio module, added Results 7.2.x 4.2x
on main menu (par. 13),
added transducer overload
(par. 5), removed diagnostic
function.

3.2 2 May 2012 M. Grippa Added linearity check


function (par. 0), added
ACTA Pulse Tools strategy
(par. 9.4), added Power
Focus calibration and 7.5.x 5.0x
docking station (par. 8.2.3
and 2.3.7), added Real Time
Traces (par. 15), general
manual review

4.0 25 September 2012 M. Grippa Added AA version (par. 1),


added barcode management 7.7.x 7.0x
in Tool Crib version, added
PowerMACS calibration

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 3 (383)


Revision history STanalyser User Guide

(par. 8.2.4), Power Focus


calibration updated (par.
8.2.3), firmware upgrade
procedure updated (par. 22),
Added SRTT-L (par. 2.3.8),
general manual review

4.1 30 October 2012 M. Grippa Job execution updated (par.


10.4), general manual 7.7.x 7.1x
review

4.2 03 April 2013 M. Grippa Real Time Traces updated


(par. 15), traces export
added (par. 14.3), added 7.9.x 7.4x
Tool selection in Barcode
programming (par. 12.3)

Click-wrench strategy
updated (par. 9.1), Power
Focus calibration and
4.3 29 July 2013 M. Grippa PowerMACS calibration 7.10.x 7.5x
updated (par. 8.2.3) and
8.2.4), Angle test added (par
8.2.2).

4.4 16 December 2013 M. Grippa Transducer QRTT-B added. 7.11.x 7.6x

Power Tool test strategy


4.5 24 March 2014 M. Grippa 7.12.x 7.7x
updated (par. 9.2 and 8.3.2),

NOTE: This manual may be altered without further notice.


For further information log on to Atlas Copco www.atlascopco.com

NOTE: The programming software (ToolsTalk BLM) may be updated with no changes
regarding the STanalyser functionalities. The minimum version indicated here is required for
the reference firmware version.

NOTE: In the event of conflicts between translations of this user guide, always refer to the
official English version.

4 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Contents

Content
Content ........................................................................................................................... 5
BATTERY INFORMATION according to European regulation 2006/66/CE ..................... 13
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 14
1.1 About this Document .............................................................................................. 14
1.2 Reference Documents............................................................................................ 16
1.3 Specifications ......................................................................................................... 17
1.4 Standard Conformity .............................................................................................. 20
2 System Overview ................................................................................................ 21
2.1 STanalyser Versions .............................................................................................. 22
2.1.1 STanalyser without RBU ......................................................................................... 23
2.1.2 Tool Crib T ............................................................................................................... 24
2.1.3 Tool Crib T/A............................................................................................................ 24
2.1.4 Production................................................................................................................ 25
2.1.5 Residual ................................................................................................................... 25
2.1.6 Advanced Analysis (AA) .......................................................................................... 26
2.2 STanalyser Typical Applications Scenario .............................................................. 27
2.2.1 Stand-alone STanalyser .......................................................................................... 27
2.2.2 STanalyser connected to Torque Supervisor .......................................................... 28
2.2.3 STanalyser connected to ToolsNet ......................................................................... 29
2.2.4 Custom application with API .................................................................................... 30
2.3 Presentation ........................................................................................................... 32
2.3.1 STanalyser assembly .............................................................................................. 35
2.3.2 RBU ......................................................................................................................... 37
2.3.3 QAT Barcode reader ............................................................................................... 40
2.3.4 IRC-W radio module ................................................................................................ 41
2.3.5 Battery ..................................................................................................................... 42
2.3.5.1 Battery Charger ......................................................................................... 42
2.3.6 External power supply ............................................................................................. 44
2.3.7 Docking station ........................................................................................................ 45
2.3.8 SRTT-L .................................................................................................................... 47
3 User Interfaces .................................................................................................... 50
3.1 Connector .............................................................................................................. 50
3.2 LEDs ...................................................................................................................... 51
3.3 Display ................................................................................................................... 52
3.4 Keyboard................................................................................................................ 53
3.5 Buzzer .................................................................................................................... 53
3.6 Network Port .......................................................................................................... 54
3.7 Mini USB Port ........................................................................................................ 54
4 Working with ToolsTalk BLM ............................................................................. 55
4.1 Software Installation ............................................................................................... 56

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 5 (383)


Contents STanalyser User Guide

4.1.1 Software registration ............................................................................................... 59


4.1.2 Software upgrade ................................................................................................... 59
4.2 ToolsTalk BLM Overview ........................................................................................ 60
4.2.1 Menu list.................................................................................................................. 61
4.2.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.3 Status bar................................................................................................................ 63
4.2.4 STanalyser Map ...................................................................................................... 64
4.3 Settings in ToolsTalk BLM ...................................................................................... 65
4.4 Connecting to the STanalyser ................................................................................. 66
4.4.1 USB connection ...................................................................................................... 66
4.4.2 Ethernet connection ................................................................................................ 69
4.5 Offline ..................................................................................................................... 71
4.6 STanalyser LOG Viewer ......................................................................................... 74
4.7 Enabling LOG File .................................................................................................. 75
5 Transducers......................................................................................................... 76
5.1 Non-ACTA Transducers Database ......................................................................... 78
5.1.1 Adding a transducer to the database ...................................................................... 79
5.1.2 Selecting the transducer for the test ....................................................................... 81
5.1.3 Transducer information ........................................................................................... 82
5.2 ACTA Transducers Report...................................................................................... 83
6 Getting Started with STanalyser ........................................................................ 85
6.1 Executing a Free Test............................................................................................. 88
6.1.1 Track ....................................................................................................................... 90
6.1.2 Peak ........................................................................................................................ 91
6.1.3 Tight Torque / Angle ............................................................................................... 92
6.1.4 Residual Torque / Time .......................................................................................... 93
6.1.5 Residual Torque / Angle ......................................................................................... 94
6.1.6 Speed...................................................................................................................... 95
7 Use of the STanalyser without RBU .................................................................. 96
7.1 Testing a Tool ......................................................................................................... 97
7.1.1 Test setup ............................................................................................................... 98
7.2 STanalyser without RBU Settings ........................................................................... 98
7.2.1 STanalyser Display Language ................................................................................ 98
7.2.2 STanalyser Date and Time ..................................................................................... 99
7.2.3 Maximum transducer overload ............................................................................. 100
7.2.4 First menu after STanalyser power on ................................................................. 100
7.2.5 Restore factory settings ........................................................................................ 101
Click on OK button on the STanalyser to enter:................................................................... 101
7.2.6 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser ............................................... 102
8 STanalyser Tool Crib ........................................................................................ 103
8.1 Use of the STanalyser Tool Crib T ........................................................................ 104
8.1.1 Testing a tool ........................................................................................................ 105
8.1.1.1 Creating a Pset ........................................................................................ 105

6 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Contents

8.1.1.2 Creating a Tool ........................................................................................ 107


8.1.1.3 Executing the test .................................................................................... 109
8.2 Use of the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A .................................................................... 110
8.2.1 Testing a tool ......................................................................................................... 111
8.2.1.1 Creating a Pset ........................................................................................ 112
8.2.1.2 Creating a Tool ........................................................................................ 113
8.2.1.3 Executing the test .................................................................................... 116
8.2.2 Angle test ............................................................................................................... 118
8.2.3 Power Focus calibration ........................................................................................ 121
8.2.4 PowerMACS calibration ......................................................................................... 126
8.3 Pset for Tool Crib ................................................................................................. 132
8.3.1 Main parameters and control strategy ................................................................... 133
8.3.2 Torque parameters ................................................................................................ 135
8.3.3 Angle parameters .................................................................................................. 138
8.3.4 Timeout .................................................................................................................. 139
8.3.5 Batch parameters .................................................................................................. 140
8.3.6 Pulse parameters .................................................................................................. 140
8.3.7 Options .................................................................................................................. 141
8.4 Linearity Check .................................................................................................... 142
8.5 STanalyser Tool Crib Settings .............................................................................. 145
8.5.1 STanalyser Display Language............................................................................... 145
8.5.2 STanalyser Date and Time .................................................................................... 146
8.5.3 Transducer overload .............................................................................................. 146
8.5.4 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Stat ..................................................................................... 147
8.5.5 STanalyser Tool Crib controller setup ................................................................... 148
8.5.5.1 Configuration ........................................................................................... 149
8.5.5.1.1 Settings STanalyser name..................................................... 149
8.5.5.1.2 Settings STanalyser date and time ........................................ 150
8.5.5.1.3 Settings the program source.................................................. 150
8.5.5.1.4 Setting the STanalyser display language .............................. 150
8.5.5.1.5 Enabling the result confirmation ............................................ 150
8.5.5.1.6 Enabling the batch result ....................................................... 151
8.5.5.1.7 Enabling Tools and Route functions on STanalyser main menu
152
8.5.5.1.8 Enabling the warning message for full memory..................... 152
8.5.5.1.9 Settings the statistics displayed during the test ..................... 153
8.5.5.1.10 Selecting frequency or pulses for pulse tools test ................. 153
8.5.5.1.11 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser ................ 153
8.5.5.2 Information .............................................................................................. 154
8.5.5.3 ToolsNet .................................................................................................. 154
8.5.5.4 IRC-W API Settings ................................................................................. 154
8.5.5.5 Memory.................................................................................................... 155
8.5.5.6 Ethernet configuration ............................................................................. 157
9 Tool testing (Tool Crib T and T/A, STanalyser without RBU, AA) ................ 158
9.1 Testing Click-wrenches ........................................................................................ 158
9.1.1 Test setup for click-wrench test ............................................................................. 161

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 7 (383)


Contents STanalyser User Guide

9.1.1.1 Measure delay time ................................................................................. 162


9.1.1.2 Reset time ............................................................................................... 162
9.1.1.3 End cycle time ......................................................................................... 163
9.1.1.4 Slip Torque .............................................................................................. 164
9.1.1.5 Filter frequency (Fcut) ............................................................................. 165
9.1.1.6 Direction (CW/CCW) ............................................................................... 165
9.1.1.7 Unit .......................................................................................................... 165
9.2 Testing Power Tools ............................................................................................. 166
9.2.1 Test setup for power tool test ............................................................................... 169
9.2.1.1 Measure delay time ................................................................................. 170
9.2.1.2 Reset time ............................................................................................... 170
9.2.1.3 End cycle time ......................................................................................... 171
9.2.1.4 Filter frequency (Fcut) ............................................................................. 171
9.2.1.5 Direction (CW/CCW) ............................................................................... 172
9.2.1.6 Unit .......................................................................................................... 172
9.3 Peak Detection Test ............................................................................................. 173
9.3.1 Testing slip-wrenches ........................................................................................... 173
9.3.2 Testing other tools ................................................................................................ 175
9.3.3 Test setup for peak detection test ........................................................................ 176
9.3.3.1 Timeout .................................................................................................... 177
9.3.3.2 Filter frequency (Fcut) ............................................................................. 178
9.3.3.3 Direction (CW/CCW) ............................................................................... 178
9.3.3.4 Unit .......................................................................................................... 178
9.4 Testing Pulse Tools .............................................................................................. 179
9.4.1 Test setup for Pulse Tool test ............................................................................... 182
9.4.1.1 End cycle time ......................................................................................... 183
9.4.1.2 Torque coefficient .................................................................................... 183
9.4.1.3 Filter frequency (Fcut) ............................................................................. 186
9.4.1.4 Direction (CW/CCW) ............................................................................... 186
9.4.1.5 Unit .......................................................................................................... 187
9.4.1.6 Threshold (THR 2) ................................................................................... 187
9.4.2 Test setup for ACTA Pulse Tool test .................................................................... 188
9.4.2.1 Measure delay time ................................................................................. 188
9.4.2.2 Reset time ............................................................................................... 189
9.4.2.3 End cycle time ......................................................................................... 190
9.4.2.4 Filter frequency (Fcut) ............................................................................. 190
9.4.2.5 Direction (CW/CCW) ............................................................................... 191
9.4.2.6 Unit .......................................................................................................... 191
10 STanalyser Production and Residual .............................................................. 192
10.1 Use of the STanalyser Production and Residual ................................................... 193
10.2 Pset for Production and Residual.......................................................................... 194
10.2.1 Torque parameters ............................................................................................... 196
10.2.2 Angle parameters ................................................................................................. 197
10.2.3 Timeout ................................................................................................................. 199
10.2.4 Batch parameters ................................................................................................. 200
10.2.5 Options.................................................................................................................. 201

8 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Contents

10.3 Creating a Multistage ........................................................................................... 202


10.4 Creating a Job ...................................................................................................... 206
10.5 Executing Psets, Multistages and Jobs ................................................................ 209
10.6 Tightening Strategies for STanalyser Production.................................................. 212
10.6.1 Torque ................................................................................................................... 215
10.6.2 Torque (Control) / Angle (Monitor)......................................................................... 217
10.6.3 Torque (Monitor) / Angle (Control)......................................................................... 219
10.6.3.1 Torque + Angle Strategy ....................................................................... 222
10.6.4 Torque (Control) / Angle (Control) OR .................................................................. 223
10.6.5 Torque (Control) / Angle (Control) AND ................................................................ 226
10.6.6 Yield Point.............................................................................................................. 229
10.6.6.1 Yield Point detection algorithm .............................................................. 230
10.6.7 Loose ..................................................................................................................... 232
10.7 Quality Control Strategies for STanalyser Residual ............................................. 234
10.7.1 Yield Point (JOINT ANALYSIS) ............................................................................. 234
10.7.2 Residual Torque/Time ........................................................................................... 236
10.7.2.1 Breakaway detection algorithm ............................................................. 237
10.7.3 Residual Torque/Angle .......................................................................................... 240
10.7.3.1 Breakaway detection algorithm ............................................................. 241
10.7.4 Residual Torque/Peak ........................................................................................... 244
10.7.5 Loose and Retight ................................................................................................. 246
10.8 STanalyser Production and Residual Settings ...................................................... 247
10.8.1 STanalyser Display Language............................................................................... 247
10.8.2 STanalyser Date and Time .................................................................................... 247
10.8.3 Maximum transducer overload .............................................................................. 248
10.8.4 STanalyser Production and Residual controller setup .......................................... 249
10.8.4.1 Configuration ......................................................................................... 250
10.8.4.1.1 Settings STanalyser name..................................................... 250
10.8.4.1.2 Settings STanalyser date and time ........................................ 251
10.8.4.1.3 Enabling Tool Recognition ..................................................... 251
10.8.4.1.4 Enabling MRTT-C Vibration Device ....................................... 251
10.8.4.1.5 Enabling STanalyser Free Mode ........................................... 252
10.8.4.1.6 Enabling STanalyser Settings menu...................................... 252
10.8.4.1.7 Enabling MRTT-C illuminating Light ...................................... 252
10.8.4.1.8 Enabling STanalyser buzzer .................................................. 252
10.8.4.1.9 Enabling warning message for Job skip ................................ 252
10.8.4.1.10 Enabling Pset/Multistage/Job grouping in Prog. Mode .......... 252
10.8.4.1.11 Enabling the result confirmation ............................................ 253
10.8.4.1.12 Set batch increment options .................................................. 253
10.8.4.1.13 Enabling STanalyser automatic shutdown ............................ 253
10.8.4.1.14 Enabling STanalyser general display timeout ....................... 253
10.8.4.1.15 Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection ............. 254
10.8.4.1.16 Setting the STanalyser display language .............................. 254
10.8.4.1.17 Setting the STanalyser date format ....................................... 254
10.8.4.1.18 Enabling the warning message for full memory..................... 255
10.8.4.1.19 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser ................ 255

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 9 (383)


Contents STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.2 Information ............................................................................................. 256


10.8.4.3 LED settings .......................................................................................... 256
10.8.4.4 Memory .................................................................................................. 258
10.8.4.4.1 Traces settings ....................................................................... 258
10.8.4.4.2 Deleting RBU objects ............................................................. 259
10.8.4.5 Ethernet configuration ........................................................................... 260
10.8.5 Tool setup ............................................................................................................. 260
10.8.5.1 Information ............................................................................................. 261
10.8.5.2 TAG Writer ............................................................................................. 263
10.8.5.2.1 Reading the TAG number ...................................................... 263
10.8.5.2.2 Writing the TAG number ........................................................ 263
10.8.5.2.3 Torque and Angle correction coefficients .............................. 264
10.8.5.2.4 Compatibility between different end fitting tools .................... 265
11 STanalyser AA (Advanced Analysis) ............................................................... 266
11.1 STanalyser AA settings ........................................................................................ 267
12 Identifier ............................................................................................................. 268
12.1 Identifier Concepts ................................................................................................ 269
12.2 Identifier Prerequisites and Details ....................................................................... 270
12.3 Configuration of Identifier Functions ..................................................................... 271
12.3.1 Configuring identifiers ........................................................................................... 271
12.3.2 Configuring a work order ...................................................................................... 273
12.3.3 Configuring result parts ......................................................................................... 274
12.3.4 Printing identifier strings ....................................................................................... 275
12.4 Scanning Identifiers with STanalyser .................................................................... 277
13 Results Viewer ................................................................................................... 280
13.1 Export Results to Excel ......................................................................................... 284
13.2 Create Report ....................................................................................................... 284
14 Traces Viewer .................................................................................................... 286
14.1 View One Trace .................................................................................................... 287
14.2 Traces Comparison .............................................................................................. 292
14.3 Copy, Print and Export Traces .............................................................................. 295
15 Real Time Traces ............................................................................................... 298
15.1 Enabling and Setting the Real Time Traces Function .......................................... 302
16 Working with Torque Supervisor ..................................................................... 305
16.1 Connecting the STanalyser to Torque Supervisor ................................................. 308
16.2 Test Execution with STanalyser Tool Crib ............................................................ 313
16.2.1 Route of Statistic Control tests ............................................................................. 315
16.2.2 Route of Cm-Cmk tests ........................................................................................ 321
16.2.3 Exit and reset a route ............................................................................................ 321
16.2.4 Route options ........................................................................................................ 322
16.2.4.1 Result confirmation and result summary ............................................... 323
16.2.4.2 “Free” and “Forced” routes .................................................................... 323
16.2.4.3 Route execution mode........................................................................... 324

10 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Contents

16.2.4.4 Route lock ............................................................................................. 324


16.2.4.5 Timeout.................................................................................................. 325
16.2.5 Test strategies and parameters ............................................................................. 325
16.3 Test Execution with STanalyser Residual............................................................. 327
16.3.1 Test strategies and parameters ............................................................................. 327
16.4 Test Execution with STanalyser AA...................................................................... 329
17 Working with ToolsNet ..................................................................................... 330
17.1 Setting Communication between STanalyser and ToolsNet ................................. 332
18 Statistics Formulas ........................................................................................... 339
19 Working with the API ........................................................................................ 340
19.1 API Connection with IRC-W ................................................................................. 343
19.2 API Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................ 347
19.3 Using the Real Time Traces with IRC-W .............................................................. 348
20 Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 354
20.1 Yearly Calibration ................................................................................................. 354
20.2 STanalyser Cleaning ............................................................................................ 354
20.3 Battery Pack Maintenance ................................................................................... 354
21 Appendix A – Calculating Correction Coefficients for MRTT-C Extensions 355
21.1 Torque Correction Coefficient............................................................................... 355
21.2 Angle Correction Coefficient ................................................................................. 356
21.3 Correction Formulas ............................................................................................. 358
22 Appendix B - Firmware Upgrade Procedure ................................................... 359
22.1 New RBU installed in the STanalyser ................................................................... 360
22.2 Upgrade the STanalyser to a newer version ......................................................... 360
22.3 Upgrade procedure .............................................................................................. 361
22.3.1 Language upload ................................................................................................... 366
22.3.2 Recovery procedure in case of problems during firmware upgrade..................... 367
23 Appendix C - STanalyser Factory Settings ..................................................... 368
24 Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................................................... 372
25 Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 376
26 Index ................................................................................................................... 377

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 11 (383)


Safety Instructions STanalyser User Guide

Safety Information

WARNING: PLEASE READ THE STanalyser SAFETY INFORMATION


No. 9836 5229 00 CAREFULLY PRIOR TO USING THE
PRODUCT AND STRICTLY FOLLOW THE SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED.

12 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Battery information

BATTERY INFORMATION according to European


regulation 2006/66/CE

BATTERY PACK SPECIFICATION

P/N: 8059 0955 61


TYPE: Lithium-ion, 3.75V 6.8Ah
WEIGHT: 155g

The cells are installed inside the battery shell:

ONCE REMOVED, THE WASTED BATTERIES MUST BE DISPOSED ACCORDING


WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 13 (383)


Introduction STanalyser User Guide

1 Introduction

1.1 About this Document

This document is a user guide for the STanalyser and it is divided into the main following parts:

Part Name Description

Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter introduces this user guide and provides
the STanalyser technical specifications.

Chapter 2 System Overview This chapter introduces the STanalyser with its
modules and accessories.

Chapter 3 User Interfaces This chapter provides an overview of the user


interfaces available on the STanalyser (LEDs, display,
keyboard, ports, etc).

Chapter 4 Working with ToolsTalk BLM This chapter introduces the operations of the
STanalyser management software.

Chapter 5 Transducers This chapter describes which type of transducer can be


connected to the STanalyser.

Chapter 6 Getting Started with STanalyser This chapter guides the operator in starting to use the
STanalyser in free test mode.

Chapter 7 Use of the STanalyser without This chapter explains how to use the STanalyser
RBU version without the RBU.

Chapter 8 Use of the STanalyser Tool This chapter explains how to use the STanalyser
Crib version Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A.

Chapter 9 Tool Testing This chapter details how to set the parameters to test
click-wrenches, slip-wrenches, power and impulse
tools for the STanalyser Tool Crib and STanalyser
without RBU.

14 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Introduction

Chapter 10 Use of the STanalyser This chapter explains how to use the STanalyser
Production and Residual version Production and Residual.

Chapter 11 Use of the STanalyser AA This chapter explains how to use the STanalyser
version Advances Analysis.

Chapter 12 Identifier This chapter describes the use of barcode readings with
the STanalyser

Chapter 13 Results Viewer This chapter explains how to retrieve the test results
from the instrument.

Chapter 14 Trace Viewer This chapter explains how to retrieve the test traces
from the instrument.

Chapter 15 Real Time Traces This chapter explains how to use the function to view
the traces from the STanalyser in real time.

Chapter 16 Working with Torque This chapter explains the use of the STanalyser with
Supervisor Torque Supervisor.

Chapter 17 Working with ToolsNet This chapter explains the use of the STanalyser with
ToolsNet.

Chapter 18 Statistics Formulas This chapter describes all of the formulas used by the
STanalyser to calculate the statistics results.

Chapter 19 Working with the API This chapter explains the use of the STanalyser with
the API interface.

Chapter 20 Maintenance and These chapters describe the required maintenance for
and 24 Troubleshooting Guide the STanalyser, and how to troubleshoot to solve the
most common problems.

Appendix A Torque / Angle Coefficient This chapter shows the operator how to calculate the
Calculation for MRTT-C correction coefficients when an extension is used with
Extension the MRTT-C.

Appendix B Firmware upgrade procedure This chapter provides a step-by-step procedure to


change the firmware version (to be used, for example,
when a different RBU type is installed in the
STanalyser).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 15 (383)


Introduction STanalyser User Guide

Appendix C STanalyser Factory Settings This chapter lists the factory settings of the STanalyser

1.2 Reference Documents

The following is a list of important documents useful for a complete view of the product in all its
applications:
• STanalyser Product Instruction (No. 9836 5229): Multilanguage safety instructions and
declaration of conformity
• ToolsTalk BLM registration procedure: How to register the software on the Atlas Copco website
• STanalyser calibration procedure: Procedure to calibrate the STanalyser (only for use of
authorized calibration centers)
• Installation guides for STanalyser modules: Detailed installation instructions, delivered with each
part
• IRTT-B, SRTT-B, MRTT-B, QRTT-B and MRTT-C User Guides
• BLM Torque Seminar
• Torque Supervisor User Guide
• STwrench-STanalyser - Introduction to BLM API: Introduction guide for API interface
• STanalyser WEEE manual: Instructions about how to dispose of the product at the end of its life

16 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Introduction

1.3 Specifications

TECHNICAL
• Torque range: The torque range is defined by the transducer connected to the STanalyser.
• Maximum torque accuracy error: ± 0.1 %.
• Maximum torque linearity error: ± 0.015 %.
• Angle measurement (only for Tool Crib T/A, AA, Production and Residual version)
• Results memory capacity: 5000 test results
• Number representation for torque values:

Transducer capacity (C) Measured torque shown on display


C < 10 N·m 1.000, 10.00
10 ≤ C < 100 N·m 1.00, 10.00, 100.0
100 ≤ C < 1000 N·m 1.0, 10.0, 100.0, 1000
C ≥ 1000 N·m 1, 10, 100, 1000

• Sampling frequency:
- Free mode (track and peak): 1 kHz
- Click-wrench test: 2 kHz
- Power tool test: 5 kHz
- Peak test: 1 kHz
- Pulse tool and ACTA pulse tool test: 10 kHz

• Maximum number of identifier strings: 300


• Units of Measurement supported: N·m, kgf·m, kgf·cm, lbf·ft, lbf·in, ozf·ft, ozf·in, kp·m, dN·m

EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY


• Input power: 100 ÷ 240 VAC, 50 ÷ 60 Hz
• AC Power Consumption: 21 W maximum
• Output: 6VDC, max 2.2A

BATTERY PACK
• Battery power supply: 3.75 V, 6.8 Ah
• Battery type: Lithium-ion (Li-ion)
• Endurance: 16 hours endurance in operation mode; 7.5 hours if IRC-W radio module is installed
• Recharging max. 8 hours

BATTERY CHARGER
• Input power: 100 ÷ 230 VAC
• AC Power Consumption: 70 W maximum

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 17 (383)


Introduction STanalyser User Guide

• Output: 4.2 VDC 13 W maximum


• Overvoltage category: II

SRTT-L
• Torque measurement range: 0.1 ÷ 30 Nm
• Torque static accuracy (from 20% to 100% of the transducer capacity): ± 0.25% of rated max.
transducer capacity
• Overload capacity: 125% of rated max. transducer capacity
• Temperature stability: 0.1% of capacity / °C
• Bridge resistance: 350 ohm
• Operation humidity: 10-75% non condensing
• Operating temperature: 5 to 40°C

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensions are in mm.


Weight: 500g

18 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Introduction

INTERFACES

• MiniUSB 2.0 port


• Transducer connector: 19 poles military connector for:
- IRTT-B and IRTT
- SRTT-B and SRTT
- MRTT-B and MRTT
- QRTT-B
- MRTT-C
- SRTT-L
- mV/V torque transducers (0.4 mV/V to 2.5 mV/V, bridge resistance 350 to 1000 Ohm)
• Barcode reader module (optional):
- Visible laser diode 650 nm
- Output power: 1 mW maximum
- Scan rate: 104 ± 12 scans/second (bi-directional)
- Scan angle: 47° ± 3°
- Scan patterns: Linear
- Minimum Print contrast: Minimum 20% absolute dark/light reflectance
measured at 650 nm
- Ambient light:
- Sunlight: 10,000 ft. candles (4,484 Lux)
- Artificial: 450 ft candles (107,640 Lux)
- EMI/RFI: FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22, AS 3548, VCCI
- Laser Safety: IEC 60825 class 2
• IRC-W dual band radio module (optional):
- Type: 802.11a/b/g/n
- Frequency:
2.412 - 2.484 GHz, channel 1 – 14, 5 MHz channel separation
5.180 - 5.240 GHz, U-NII-1, channel 36, 40, 44, 48, 20 MHz channel
separation
- RF output power: 802.11b (DSSS): +20dBm (typ.), 802.11g/n (OFDM):
+17dBm (typ.), 802.11a/n (OFDM): +15dBm (typ.)
- Receive input level (max): -10 dBm

ENVIRONMENTAL

The following conditions must be observed during operation:


• Internal Use only
• Environmental Class: II
• IP Grade according to EN IEC 60529: IP40
• Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40°C
• Atmospheric humidity: 95%, non-condensing
• Altitude: Up to 2000m

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 19 (383)


Introduction STanalyser User Guide

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The following are the PC minimum requirements for installation of STanalyser management software
(ToolsTalk BLM):

• Processor: 400 MHz (800 MHz or above recommended)


• Memory: 256 Mb or above
• Hard disk space: 610 Mb (1 Gb recommended)
• Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors (1024 x 768, High Color (16-bit) recommended)
• Operating Systems: Windows XP, Windows 7 32/64 bit
• Internet Explorer 5.01 or later (required for installation of the .NET Framework)
• Windows Installer 3.1
• Microsoft Excel (required to view the exported file with the tightening results)
Note: A system should meet these or the minimum requirements for the operating system, whichever is
higher

CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE

STanalyser is provided with an Atlas Copco BLM factory calibration certificate.

1.4 Standard Conformity

The STanalyser is in conformity with the requirements of the council Directives on 06/22/1998 on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating:

• 2004/108/CE EMC Directive - Electromagnetic Compatibility


• 2006/95/CE Low Voltage Directive

The STanalyser is marked with the following symbol:

20 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2 System Overview
Transducers

ToolsTalk BLM
Bar code reader

IRC-W
PC

STanalyser

The STanalyser is a modular instrument designed for optimal operations in:


• Tool testing: The STanalyser (Tool Crib and AA versions) offers a set of tests for evaluating
click-wrenches, slip-wrenches, power tools and pulse tools, measuring the torque/angle values and
producing results with statistical parameters. This makes possible to keep the quality of the
tightening operations on a production line under control. The test results can be retrieved by the
STanalyser management software (ToolsTalk BLM), or exported into Microsoft Excel.
• Tightening operations: The STanalyser (Production version) offers a set of strategies to perform
tightening operations. The tightening operation can be performed in only torque, torque and/or the
angle, or to the yield point. The barcode reader can scan the VIN number to be associated to the
related tightening data.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 21 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

• Quality tests: The STanalyser (Residual and AA versions) offers a set of strategies to perform
residual torque tests and joint analysis. With this instrument it is possible to keep under control the
quality of the tightenings on the assembly line, and to perform analysis of the joints
characteristics.
The STanalyser can also work in conjunction with Torque Supervisor, which sends the route of
tests and retrieve the results, and can send tightening data and traces to ToolsNet.

2.1 STanalyser Versions


This chapter provides an overview of the STanalyser versions. The STanalyser version is defined by the
Rapid Backup Unit (RBU) installed:
STanalyser Tool Crib
Tool Crib T Production Residual AA
without RBU T/A

FUNCTIONS
RBU – Rapid Backup Unit - YES YES YES YES YES
Free mode test YES YES YES YES YES YES
Click Wrench test YES YES YES - - YES
Peak test (Slip Wrench) YES YES YES - - YES
Power Tool test YES YES YES - - YES
Pulse Tool test YES YES YES - - YES
from S/N from S/N from S/N from S/N
ACTA Pulse Tools test - -
5560.0600 5560.0600 5560.0600 5560.0600
Pset definition - 1000 1000 200 (Pset + 200 1000
Multistage definition - - - Multistage) - -
Job definition - - - 100 100 -
Only with
Angle measurement - - YES YES YES
encoder
Cm-Cmk - YES YES - - YES
Non-ACTA transducer database - 20 20 20 20 20
Tool database - 1000 1000 - - 1000
Results viewer YES YES YES YES YES YES
Traces viewer - YES YES YES YES YES
Quality strategies - - - - YES YES
Production strategies - - - YES - -
Joint analysis - - - - YES YES
TAG recognition - - - YES YES YES

22 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

STanalyser
Tool Crib T Tool Crib T/A Production Residual AA
without RBU
Real time traces - YES YES YES YES YES
Linearity check - YES YES - - YES

OPTIONAL MODULES
Radio modules - IRC-W IRC-W IRC-W IRC-W IRC-W
Barcode scanner - YES YES YES YES YES
CONNECTIVITY
ToolsTalk BLM YES YES YES YES YES YES
Ethernet - YES YES YES YES YES
Torque Supervisor - YES YES - YES YES
ToolsNet - YES YES YES YES YES
Power Focus / PowerMACS
- - YES - - YES
calibration
With API With API
API interface - - With API RBU With API RBU
RBU RBU

2.1.1 STanalyser without RBU

This STanalyser version works only as a stand alone instrument. It provides a free mode menu (track or
peak functions) and the test function of wrenches, power tools and pulse tools.
The results are stored in the STanalyser memory and can be retrieved (and possibly printed) by the
management software (ToolsTalk BLM), but they cannot be transferred to any remote devices; they can be
exported to Excel and possibly printed.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 23 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.1.2 Tool Crib T

RBU - Tool Crib T

The STanalyser Tool Crib T provides a free mode menu (track or peak functions) and the test function of
wrenches, power tools and pulse tools. It provides Pset definition, transducers database, real time statistics
on the display. The measurement is made in only torque (without angle measurement).
The results are stored in the STanalyser memory and can be retrieved (and possibly printed) by the
management software (ToolsTalk BLM), or exported to Excel.
This version can also work in conjunction with Torque Supervisor. See the Working with Torque
Supervisor chapter for details.

2.1.3 Tool Crib T/A

RBU - Tool Crib T/A

The STanalyser Tool Crib T/A provides a free mode menu (track or peak functions) and the test function
of wrenches, power tools and pulse tools. It provides Pset definition, transducers database, real time
statistics on the display. This instrument provides also angle measurement and Power Focus /
PowerMACS calibration function.
The results are stored in the STanalyser memory and can be retrieved (and possibly printed) by the
management software (ToolsTalk BLM), or exported to Excel.
This version can also work in conjunction with Torque Supervisor. See the Working with Torque
Supervisor chapter for details.

24 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.1.4 Production

RBU - Production

The STanalyser Production provides a free mode menu (track, peak, tightening torque/angle) and
strategies to perform a tightening. It provides Pset definition, VIN number scanning, trace viewer function.
The measurement is made in torque and angle.
The results are stored in the STanalyser memory and can be retrieved (and possibly printed) by the
management software (ToolsTalk BLM), or exported to Excel.

2.1.5 Residual

RBU - Residual

The STanalyser Residual provides a free mode menu (track, peak, residual torque/time, residual
torque/angle) and strategies to perform a residual torque check on joints, including a strategy to perform
the joint analysis. It provides Pset definition, VIN number scanning, trace viewer function. The
measurement is made in torque and angle.
The results are stored in the STanalyser memory and can be retrieved (and possibly printed) by the
management software (ToolsTalk BLM), or exported to Excel.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 25 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.1.6 Advanced Analysis (AA)

RBU - AA

The STanalyser AA version provides all of the functions available in the Tool Crib T/A and Residual
versions, making this STanalyser a complete instrument for QAT purposes, able to test both tools and
joints.

26 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.2 STanalyser Typical Applications Scenario


This chapter provides a quick overview of the main applications of the STanalyser.

2.2.1 Stand-alone STanalyser

The STanalyser can work as a stand-alone instrument, programmed by its management software
(ToolsTalk BLM), which can display the traces, retrieve tightening results, to be exported in a Microsoft
Excel file, and possibly printed, if required.

See the Working with ToolsTalk BLM chapter for details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 27 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.2.2 STanalyser connected to Torque Supervisor

The STanalyser Tool Crib, Residual and AA versions can work in conjunction with Torque Supervisor.
The communication is performed trough USB, network cable, or IRC-W module.

In this application Torque Supervisor generates and sends to the STanalyser the list of tests to be done (the
“route”). After having executed the tests, Torque Supervisor downloads the results and keep them in the
tool statistics.

The ToolsTalk BLM is necessary only for settings of the STanalyser; for basic operation of the STanalyser
with Torque Supervisor connected via USB, it can be not necessary.

In the typical application the Torque Supervisor is installed in one or more dedicated PC, and ToolsTalk
BLM on another one. However, they can run on the same PC

See the Working with Torque Supervisor chapter for details.

28 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.2.3 STanalyser connected to ToolsNet

USB or Network

IRC-W

Access point

Network

The STanalyser, except for the STanalyser without RBU, can send results to ToolsNet. The Production,
Residual and AA versions can also send the traces.

The IRC-W module must be installed in the STanalyser.

See the Working with ToolsNet chapter for details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 29 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.2.4 Custom application with API

Network IRC-W

30 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

In this scenario the STanalyser is driven by a custom application, using the API (Application Programmer
Interface). The connection is done by USB cable, IRC-W or Ethernet. With IRC-W and Ethernet
connection it is possible to connect more than one STanalyser to the API.

The STanalyser must be equipped with an API RBU.


The ToolsTalk BLM is optional. The custom application takes care of driving the STanalyser, retrieving
the tightening results and traces, interfacing possibly with printer and/or customer database.

See the Working with the API chapter for details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 31 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.3 Presentation
The STanalyser is modular. The minimum set of required modules is:

STanalyser Controller

The main module of the STanalyser, which contains all the


hardware and firmware.
Controller is provided without battery.

External Power Supply

Power supply. It also charges the battery when installed in the


STanalyser.
If battery and its battery charger are used, the external power
supply is not strictly necessary.

ToolsTalk BLM

The STanalyser management software. It features STanalyser


programming, STanalyser configuration, and retrieving the results
from the STanalyser.

32 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

The following are additional modules for the STanalyser:

STanalyser RBU (Rapid Backup Unit)

Module to be installed in the STanalyser. It defines the


STanalyser type and stores test data, tools and transducers
archives.
NOTE: Each RBU requires a different STanalyser firmware.
The RBU is delivered with CD containing the firmware.

STanalyser Battery

Power supply.

NOTE: Battery is optional. The STanalyser can be powered also by


the external power supply.

Battery charger and adapter

The STanalyser battery can be recharged when installed in the


unit by the external power supply, or on the specific battery
charger.
The battery charger is the same of the one for the STwrench, and
required the adapter to recharge the STanalyser battery.

QAT Barcode module

Module for scanning barcode labels on assembly components for


easy traceability.
It cannot be installed the STanalyser without RBU.

QAT IRC-W dual band radio module

Radio module for interfacing the STanalyser with ToolsNet,


Torque Supervisor or API interface.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 33 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

Docking station

The docking station performs the STanalyser connecting to


Power Focus and PowerMACS for calibration.

SRTT-L

Torque transducer to be installed on the STanalyser to create a


single unit with the transducer and the measurement system.
Mechanical joint simulators are also available to test power an
impulse tools on the SRTT-L.

34 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.3.1 STanalyser assembly


The STanalyser is delivered in separated packages for each module; in order to start working with the
instrument, put all the pieces together:
1. Remove the cover from the controller.
2. If purchased, insert the RBU and IRC-W radio module inside the controller. Tighten the screws
(to the torque applied by your fingers. Do not use pliers).
3. If purchased, insert the QAT Barcode Reader module and tighten the two mounting screws.
4. Mount the cover (tighten the two screws).
5. Insert battery, or connect the external power supply.
6. Switch on the STanalyser. If the message “Please connect to ToolsTalk BLM for firmware
upgrade” is shown, the firmware must be updated according to the RBU type (the default
firmware loaded if the Tool Crib). See the Appendix B - Firmware Upgrade Procedure chapter for
details.

Cover

RBU
IRC-W
module
Barcode
reader
Battery, or battery cover if
battery not purchased.

STanalyser
controller

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 35 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

Connect the power supply, or insert a charged battery, insert the RBU if purchased (see the next paragraph
for RBU installation), and the STanalyser is ready for the use:

Connector for transducers


Network

Barcode reader

LEDs

Buzzer
Mini USB port

Display

External power supply


connector

Keyboard

The next paragraphs describe all the STanalyser modules and user interfaces in detail. To start working
with the STanalyser immediately, go to the Getting Started with STanalyser chapter.

36 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.3.2 RBU

RBU (Rapid Backup Unit) is a memory chip which defines which functions are
activated and provides backup for your test programs.
It stores also the specific settings of your STanalyser (see the default configuration in
the chapter Appendix C - STanalyser Factory Settings); by installing your RBU in
another STanalyser you therefore get an exact copy of the original one (except for test
results, stored in the STanalyser memory and not in the RBU).

The following types of RBU are available:

• RBU Tool Crib T: Enables the test of tools and wrenches, without angle measurement.
• RBU Tool Crib T/A: Enables the test of tools and wrenches, with angle measurement.
• RBU Tool Crib T/A API: Same of the RBU Tool Crib T/A, plus API interface.
• RBU Production: Enables the strategies for execute a tightening operation.
• RBU Production API: Same of the RBU Production, plus API interface.
• RBU Residual: Enables the strategies to evaluate the residual torque and to execute the joint
analysis.
• RBU Residual API: Same of the RBU Residual, plus API interface.
• RBU AA: Enables the test of tools and wrenches (with angle measurement) and the strategies to
evaluate the residual torque and to execute the joint analysis.
• RBU AA API: Same of the RBU AA, plus API interface.

• No RBU installed: If the RBU is not installed, the STanalyser works as “STanalyser without
RBU”. This version without RBU requires the Tool Crib firmware uploaded on the STanalyser.

WARNING: RBU used in STanalyser with firmware version 7.5 should be not used in
STanalyser with firmware version before 7.5. Some Psets might be not compatible and create
errors when activated.

WARNING: When replacing the RBU with one of different type, the traces possibly stored in
the STanalyser are deleted. Save the traces if needed, before replacing the RBU.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 37 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

To insert the RBU in the STanalyser, turn off the device, remove the back cover, insert the RBU module,
and tighten the two nuts by hands (do not use pliers).

Back Nuts
cover

RBU

Battery

NOTE: Based on the RBU type, the STanalyser must be equipped with a different firmware
version.

When you turn on the STanalyser with a new RBU the, if the message “Please connect to the ToolsTalk
BLM for firmware upgrade” is shown on the display after the RBU is installed, the STanalyser must be
connected to the ToolsTalk BLM software for upgrading.
See the Appendix B - Firmware Upgrade Procedure chapter for details.
If a certain firmware version is uploaded, but the RBU is not present in the STanalyser, the message “RBU
not present” is shown on the display.

The first time of RBU usage, the following message is shown:

38 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

Select RBU The data (STanalyser settings and all the test programs) are loaded from the
RBU; all the data stored in the STanalyser memory are overwritten.

This option is automatically selected if the new RBU installed on the unit does
not support the data stored into the STanalyser.

Select STa Memory The data are loaded from the STanalyser memory; all the data present in the
RBU are overwritten.

This option works only if the new RBU type is compatible with the data stored
in the STanalyser memory (and thus with the old RBU which was installed on
the STanalyser); if not the Select RBU option is automatically selected.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 39 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.3.3 QAT Barcode reader

The QAT Barcode reader is a module to be installed into the STanalyser to permit
scanning of barcodes.
An identifier, or barcode string, may be used to select the tightening program to be
executed, identify motor vehicles (VIN) and other work pieces, variants, and
operators. The tightening result can then be saved together with this information.

To install the barcode reader module, turn off the STanalyser, remove the cover (by removing the two
screws) and insert the module (tighten the two screws):

QAT Barcode

After having installed the module in the STanalyser, it is possible to add the identifiers reading to the
tightening programs. See the chapter Identifier for details.

40 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.3.4 IRC-W radio module

The IRC-W Dual Band radio module is used to interface the STanalyser with the
ToolsNet, Torque Supervisor or API interface.

To install the IRC-W module, turn off the STanalyser, remove the cover and insert the IRC-W module in
the right-bottom connector (tighten the two screws with your fingers). Do not install the module in the left
connector.

IRC-W Radio

Right
connector

After having installed the module the radio module parameters must be set trough ToolsTalk BLM. See
the chapter Working with ToolsNet or Working with the API or Working with Torque Supervisor for more
information.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 41 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.3.5 Battery

STanalyser can operate powered by its battery pack or by the external power supply. The rechargeable
Lithium-ion battery ensures over 16 hours of operating time.

2. Insert this side first Battery

1. Remove the cover

Controller

When the battery is not used, install the original cover supplied with the device.
To install the battery, turn off the STanalyser, remove the cover and then install the battery.
To replace a battery, switch off the STanalyser, remove the battery and install a new one.

NOTE: Refer to the chapter Maintenance for important notes about how to keep battery in a
good working order.

2.3.5.1 Battery Charger

The battery can be charged either when installed in the STanalyser (by the external power supply) or with
the specific battery charger. The battery charger is the same used for the STwrench. The specific adapter
to connect the STanalyser is required.

Adapter
Battery charger

Simply connect the input AC power cable to the battery charger and plug in the battery in the adapter.

42 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

Insert STanalyser battery


in the adapter

The three LEDs on the battery charger provide the battery charge status:

LED
Status POWER ON CHARGING COMPLETE

Power on

Charging in
progress
Charging
complete
Over
Blinking
temperature

Error

In case of Over temperature, disconnect the battery to the battery charger, disconnect charger from AC
power, wait few minutes, reconnect the battery charger to AC power and the battery to the charger, and
check if the problem gets solved.
In case of Error, disconnect and then reconnect the battery to the battery charger and check if the problem
gets solved.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 43 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

2.3.6 External power supply

The external power supply provides power to the instrument, and it also charges the battery when the
battery installed in the STanalyser. The battery is charged even if the STanalyser is switched off.
The battery icon on the STanalyser shows the recharging process only when the STanalyser is switched
on.
Connect the external power supply to AC power 100 ÷ 230 VAC 50/60 Hz, and plug the connector into
the STanalyser.

Connector for
External power
external power
supply
supply

WARNING: Use only the power supply ordered from Atlas Copco. Warranty does not cover
damages to the STanalyser caused by the use of a different external power supply.

44 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.3.7 Docking station

The docking station connects the STanalyser to Power Focus and PowerMACS for calibration.

Cable holder

STanalyser
Docking station

Serial port

To install the STanalyser in the docking station, follow these steps:

• Remove the battery


• Push up the supports and insert the STanalyser in the docking station:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 45 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

• Push down the STanalyser and release the supports:

• Connect the external power supply to the STanalyser.


• Connect the transducer to the STanalyser with the ACTA cable. Fix the cable to the docking
station using the cable holder.

For Power Focus calibration see the Power Focus calibration chapter.
For PowerMACS calibration see the PowerMACS calibration chapter.

46 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

2.3.8 SRTT-L

Transducer

Lever

Connector

The SRTT-L is a torque transducer to be installed on the STanalyser to create a single unit with the
transducer and the measurement system.

The following models are available:

Code Description Capacity


8059095586 SRTT-L 1 Nm 1 Nm
8059095587 SRTT-L 4 Nm 4Nm
8059095588 SRTT-L 12 Nm 12 Nm
8059095589 SRTT-L 30 Nm 30 Nm
8059095585 SRTT-L main plate -

To use the SRTT-L, install first the transducer on the main plate:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 47 (383)


System Overview STanalyser User Guide

Then, insert and slide the STanalyser on the main plate, and finally rotate the SRTT-L lever to connect the
SRTT-L to the STanalyser:

There is no need of any setup. Simply switch on the STanalyser and the SRTT-L is ready to use.
The plate can be attached to a table; refer to the following mechanical drawing for dimensions
(dimensions are in millimeters):

48 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide System Overview

A series of mechanical joint simulators are available to test power and impulse tools on the SRTT-L:

Hard joint Soft joint


simulation simulation

The following models are available:

Code Description Drive To be used on


4145098480 Test Joint M4 Soft 1Nm M4 SRTT-L 1 Nm
4145098483 Test Joint M4 Hard 1Nm M4 SRTT-L 1 Nm
4145098482 Test Joint M6 Soft 4Nm M6 SRTT-L 4 Nm
4145098485 Test Joint M6 Hard 4Nm M6 SRTT-L 4 Nm
4145098580 Test Joint M6 Soft 12Nm M6 SRTT-L 12 Nm
4145098582 Test Joint M6 Hard 12Nm M6 SRTT-L 12 Nm
4145098581 Test Joint M8 Soft 12Nm M8 SRTT-L 12 Nm
4145098583 Test Joint M8 Hard 12Nm M8 SRTT-L 12 Nm
4145098680 Test Joint M8 Soft 30Nm M8 SRTT-L 30 Nm
4145098682 Test Joint M8 Hard 30Nm M8 SRTT-L 30 Nm
4145098681 Test Joint M10 Soft 30Nm M10 SRTT-L 30 Nm
4145098683 Test Joint M10 Hard 30Nm M10 SRTT-L 30 Nm

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 49 (383)


User interfaces STanalyser User Guide

3 User Interfaces

3.1 Connector

Connector for transducers

A industrial standard female 19-pole MS31121219S connector is available to connect the STanalyser to
the transducers.
Use a standard Atlas Copco cable to connect the ACTA transducers to the STanalyser.
The connector pinout is as follows:

Pin Description Pin Description

A V+ transducer H FA encoder

B V- transducer P Ground encoder

C Signal + R +5.5 V encoder


Reserved.
D Signal - Other pins
Do not connect anything to these pins.
E Shield

F FB encoder

For non-ACTA transducers, the range for the bridge resistance is 350 ÷ 1000 Ohm.

50 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide User interfaces

3.2 LEDs
A set of four rows of LEDs provides information about the ongoing test.

NOTE: The LEDs are disabled for the STanalyser Production and Residual versions when
using the MRTT-C; in that case the MRTT-C LEDs are used instead.

LEDs

OK (green) Result OK.

n x OK (blue) Batch OK (not valid for STanalyser without RBU).

Statistic control test with Not OK result (not valid for STanalyser without
Alarm (yellow)
RBU).

NOK (red) Result Not OK.

NOTE: The LED behavior changes according to the STanalyser version and test type. The
specific behavior for each test type is explained in the related chapters of this manual.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 51 (383)


User interfaces STanalyser User Guide

3.3 Display
The STanalyser display allows you to explore the STanalyser menu, and monitoring torque and angle
during the tightening operation:
Current Date / Time or Menu title
Tightening Direction

Battery level

Statistics (or Angle)


Torque

Batch count

Current Date / Time In the main menu, the display shows alternately the current date and time on the
and Menu title display. When entering a sub-menu, it shows the menu title.

Battery level Indicates battery status.

Tightening directions Indicates the tool tightening direction (clockwise, counterclockwise, or both).

Torque Indicates the current measurement.

Statistics These parameters provide per default the minimum value (min), the maximum
value (Max), the average (Avg) and the Standard Deviation (Std) of the test
executed. Any of the four fields can be customized to show a different
statistical parameter.

See the chapter Statistics Formulas for details of the formulas used to calculate
these parameters.

The STanalyser T/A, Production and Residual versions show the angle reading
instead of the statistics.

Batch count If the batch is enabled in the Pset, this field shows how many tests are already
executed over the batch size.

52 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide User interfaces

3.4 Keyboard
Use the keyboard to browse the STanalyser menu:

Icon Name Description

Switch on the STanalyser, OK (confirm button),


ON, OK
enter menu.

Down (browse menu), decrease value in settings


DOWN
menus.

OFF, CL Switch off the STanalyser, Clear (exit menu).

Up (browse menu), increase value in settings


UP
menus.
For STanalyser without RBU: While in the test
execution window, reset statistics and erase
results.

For STanalyser Production and Residual:


RESET Activated Barcode scanner (if installed) and
activate the illuminating light (for 10 seconds) on
the MRTT-C.

For STanalyser Tool Crib: Not used.

3.5 Buzzer
Along with the onboard LEDs, the STanalyser has also a buzzer, to give more indications on the result of
the current operation. A high tone is emitted in case of OK result, while a lower tone is emitted in case of
test Not OK. For details, see the specific chapters for various tests available on the STanalyser.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 53 (383)


User interfaces STanalyser User Guide

3.6 Network Port


The network port can be used, as the USB port, for programming the STanalyser with ToolsTalk BLM or
with Torque Supervisor. The STanalyser without RBU does not support the network connection.
See the Working with ToolsTalk BLM chapter for details.

3.7 Mini USB Port


The USB port is available for programming the STanalyser with ToolsTalk BLM or with Torque
Supervisor.
See the Working with ToolsTalk BLM chapter for details.

It is also used for firmware upgrade (reserved for Atlas Copco service personnel).

54 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

4 Working with ToolsTalk BLM

ToolsTalk BLM is a PC software package developed to manage the STanalyser.


It offers easy user-friendly programming and real time monitoring of the
STanalyser.
ToolsTalk BLM serves as an interface between the user and the STanalyser. With
ToolsTalk BLM, users can configure the STanalyser, and receives the results and
traces by the STanalyser.

The main features are:

• Pset definition
• Transducers and tool database
• Settings of the STanalyser
• Review of results and traces from the STanalyser

The software saves all of your tightening programs in a .sta file; you can use this file to save/load a set of
tightening programs.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 55 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

4.1 Software Installation

NOTE: Installation must be done with PC administrator rights.

NOTE: Do not install the software from a shared folder/drive. Install the software from the
supplied CD; if the CD content is copied into a PC folder, it must be a PC local folder.

To install the software, simply click on the setup file in the installation CD and follows the instructions.

NOTE: For Window 7 operating system, right-click on the setup file and select the Run as
Administrator command:

Click on Continue Anyway if this Windows message is shown:

56 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

If the installation is done without a STanalyser connected, at the end of the installation, the software
requires the user to connect a STanalyser to the PC to continue with driver installation:

Turn on the STanalyser and wait until initialization has finished and the main menu is shown on the
STanalyser display. Connect the STanalyser to the PC through the USB cable and the new hardware setup
wizard is shown:

Select No, not this time, and click on Next

Select Install the software automatically, and click on


Next.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 57 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

Click on Continue Anyway if this Windows message


is shown.

Wait the end of the installation and click on Finish.

After installation, launch the program by selecting Start → Program → Atlas Copco Tools AB →
ToolsTalk BLM:

58 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

NOTE: For Windows 7 operating system, at the first usage of the software, right-click on the
ToolsTalk BLM icon and select Run as Administrator to start the software; an error message
may be shown otherwise:

4.1.1 Software registration

After installing the software you need to register at www.atlascopco.com/tools/software; if not registered,
the software works as demo for 60 days.
The registration is required only for STanalyser with RBU. The ToolsTalk BLM, when used with the
STanalyser without RBU, does not need a license.

The registration form can be open from the Start → Atlas Copco Tools AB → ACTLicense menu:

4.1.2 Software upgrade

When upgrading the ToolsTalk BLM software to a news version, simply install the new version without
the need of uninstalling the previous one.
All of the STanalyser settings, and tightening programs and results are not affected by the upgrade
process.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 59 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

4.2 ToolsTalk BLM Overview

Almost every function in ToolsTalk BLM has its own window. The figure below shows the ToolsTalk
BLM interface with menu list, toolbar and STanalyser Map.
There is more than one way to start a function in ToolsTalk BLM: Click on a symbol in the toolbar or
double-click on the text in STanalyser Map.

Menu list

Toolbar

Select STanalyser

STanalyser Map

Status bar

NOTE: ToolsTalk BLM adapts automatically to the STanalyser type and firmware version;
therefore, some menus or commands may be hidden or disabled, if not supported by your
version of the STanalyser.

60 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

4.2.1 Menu list

The following options are available in the ToolsTalk BLM Menu list:
Illustration Name Description
File Read and store the .STA files containing all the tightening programs.

View Enable the Toolbar and the Status bar in the main page of ToolsTalk
BLM.

Tools This menu provides the following options:


- Select target STanalyser: Scan for STanalysers connected to
ToolsTalk BLM
- List available STanalyser devices: Define all of your STanalysers
with their network parameters.
- STanalyser log viewer: Provides details of the ToolsTalk BLM –
STanalyser communication
- Log management: Enables a log file for monitoring all the software
operations
- Upgrade Firmware and Import Firmware: Functions for update the
STanalyser to a newer version.
- Export/import traces to/from the PC.
- Language settings: Defines the language for the ToolsTalk BLM
- Settings for the Real Time Traces function.

Window This sets the layout of the ToolsTalk BLM main page.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 61 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

Illustration Name Description


Help Help menu.

4.2.2 Toolbar
The toolbar icons are shortcuts to the basic functions in ToolsTalk BLM.
Icon Icon name Description
Transducer Click on this icon to add a new non-ACTA transducer to the transducers database.

See the Non-ACTA Transducers Database chapter for details.

Pset Click on this icon to create a new Pset.

See the Pset chapter for details.

Tool Click on this icon to add a new tool in the tools archive.

See the Testing a tool chapter for details.

Identifiers Click on this icon to configure the identifiers strings for the barcode reader module.

See the Identifier chapter for more information.

Controller This icon opens the Controller programming section; use the arrow to the right of the icon to
select one of the sub-menus.
Controller contains information and settings for STanalyser.

See the STanalyser controller setup chapter for more information.

Tools Active only for Production, Residual and AA versions, this icon displays information about the
MRTT-C connected, and programs the RFID TAG of the end fitting tools.

Results Viewer This icon opens the Results Viewer page.

See the Results Viewer chapter for more information.

62 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

Icon Icon name Description


STanalyser Map This icon opens the STanalyser Map if it is closed.

See the STanalyser Map chapter for more information.

Connect The Connect icon changes appearance depending on the connection status. When the PC is not
connected with the STanalyser, this icon is visible. Clicking on it establishes a connection
between the PC and STanalyser.

See the Connecting to the STanalyser chapter for more information.

Disconnect Once a connection is established this icon is shown. Clicking on it disconnects the PC from the
STanalyser.

Help This icon opens the Help section.

4.2.3 Status bar

The status bar is shown when the STanalyser is connected to ToolsTalk BLM.

It provides the connection status between the PC and the STanalyser. The battery icon shows the battery
level:
• Green: Battery level over 50%
• Yellow: Battery level under 50%
• Red: Battery level under 30%
When the battery is not present and the unit is powered by the external power supply, the icon changes as
follow:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 63 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

4.2.4 STanalyser Map

STanalyser Map STanalyser Map


for Tool Crib and for Production and
AA versions Residual versions

The STanalyser Map defines the test/tightening programs directly on the STanalyser; once created, they
are automatically transferred to the instrument. The STanalyser Map provides also shortcuts to
STanalyser configuration and result review. The STanalyser map adapts and slightly change its submenus
according to the specific STanalyser type connected.
Click on the minus or plus symbols to close and open menus, and double click on function names to open
the corresponding function.
For Pset (and Multistage / Job when applicable), right-click on
an item to open, delete, clone (creating a new item) or copy it
(to paste is on an existing item).

64 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

See the chapters dedicated to the different STanalyser versions to view in details how to create and setup a
test for your specific STanalyser.
All the information defined in the STanalyser map can be saved in a .sta file, by selecting File → Save As
in the main ToolsTalk BLM window.
The name shown in the STanalyser map can be customized in the
Controller → Configuration menu.

Enter STanalyser
name

Click

4.3 Settings in ToolsTalk BLM


You can set the language from the Tools → Change language menu:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 65 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

4.4 Connecting to the STanalyser

The connection between the ToolsTalk BLM and the STanalyser can be done either via USB or Ethernet.
The USB connection can be done easily with the USB cable between the PC and the STanalyser; the
Ethernet connection gives advantages of higher data transfer speed, chance to connect more than one
device to ToolsTalk BLM and the chance to connect a STanalyser to the PC with ToolsTalk BLM even if
they would be in different location of the company. Note that before being able to use the Ethernet
connection the STanalyser must be properly configured, by connecting the device to ToolsTalk BLM via
USB.

4.4.1 USB connection

NOTE: When the external power supply is used, connect the power supply to the STanalyser
before connecting the USB cable from the STanalyser and the PC.

66 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

If you are connecting the STanalyser to the PC with the software for the first time, you need to enter the
Tools → Select Target STanalyser:

Click on
Scan

Select the
STanalyser

This operation is necessary only once.

After the first time, perform the following sequence:

• Launch the ToolsTalk BLM on the PC


• Turn on the STanalyser and wait for the STanalyser to power on (the main menu is shown on the
STanalyser display)

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 67 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

• Connect the STanalyser to the PC through USB cable (with the STanalyser already turned on)
• Select STanalyser, and click on the arrow of the Connect icon and select USB to connect to the
STanalyser:

2. Click on
the arrow

3. Select
USB 1. Select
STanalyser

It is also possible to right-click on icon in the STanalyser map:

2. Right-click
1. Select
STanalyser

3. Select
USB

When the STanalyser is connected, the Connect icon is disabled, the Disconnect icon becomes active, and
the STanalyser Map is shown:

Disconnect
icon

STanalyser
map

68 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

4.4.2 Ethernet connection

The Ethernet connection can be done with a network cable between the PC and the STanalyser, or
connecting both of them to the same network. In case the STanalyser is connected directly to the PC, use a
crossed network cable.
The Ethernet connection is not available for the STanalyser without RBU.
The STanalyser must be configured with the network parameters.
If not already done, connect the STanalyser to the PC with ToolsTalk BLM via USB cable (as described in
the previous paragraph), and select Controller → Ethernet configuration:

Set the parameters as following:

Port Set any port available in your own system.

IP Address, Subnet mask Set valid parameters according with your own network, or PC
and Default gateway network parameter if connecting the STanalyser directly to the
PC.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 69 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

Once set, click on Add to favourite… to save them into a local archive, and click on Store to save the
configuration.
The list of the devices added to the “favourite” is shown under the Connect icon menu:

Click on the
arrow

List of STanalysers
defined

Connect the network cable to the STanalyser and select it from the list.

When the STanalyser is connected, the Connect icon is disabled, the Disconnect icon becomes active, and
the STanalyser Map is shown:

Disconnect
icon

STanalyser
map

70 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

4.5 Offline

NOTE: Files created offline with ToolsTalk BLM from version 7.10 are not supported by
STanalyser with firmware version before 7.5.

Select
STanalyser

Offline area

The Offline mode gives the user the opportunity to create transducers, tools and Pset without a STanalyser
connected to the PC. All of the data are stored to (or load from) a .sta file. It is possible to copy this file to
one or more STanalyser.

To work in this mode, disconnect the STanalyser from ToolsTalk BLM, then select File → New or File
→ Open to start a new session or to open an existing file (or double-click on File):

Create a new
file or open an
existing one Select File

When creating a new file, the following window is shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 71 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

Select the Device type from the list; this will enable only the relevant test/tightening strategies for the
version selected. It is also possible to set a maximum number of Psets/Multistages/Jobs. The Description
is an optional field.

72 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

Once the data are completed in the offline mode, select File → Save as to transfer them to the
STanalyser:

Select one of the export options:


• Overwrite all STanalyser objects: clear
all the existing data on the STanalyser,
and sends the selected items.
• Update STanalyser objects overwriting
Transducers / Psets / them: Overwrite the selected items on
Tools selection the STanalyser, not deleting the other
programs already present.
• Update STanalyser objects without
overwriting them: Update the
Select what to transfer to STanalyser with sending the selected
the STanalyser items. If an item is already present it is
not overwritten.

Search toolbar

Click on the selection icon to select / unselect all the items at the same
time.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 73 (383)


Working with ToolsTalk BLM STanalyser User Guide

4.6 STanalyser LOG Viewer


The STanalyser log viewer function shows information about the STanalyser – ToolsTalk BLM
communication.
This can be helpful for troubleshooting activities.

Select Tool → STanalyser log viewer to open the log window.

STanalyser Log Viewer

All the messages related to STanalyser – ToolsTalk BLM communication are displayed in the log
windows. Click on Save log as to save the log file.

Log messages

The toolbar in the upper area of the STanalyser LOG Viewer window provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Select / Unselect all messages. Delete all messages.

Copy the selected message(s) to the


clipboard. Save LOG file (CSV, XML or LOG file).

74 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsTalk BLM

4.7 Enabling LOG File


An additional LOG file can be enabled. This log file is more specific for ToolsTalk BLM operation
respect to the STanalyser LOG viewer.
Normally, this should be left disabled in order to not generating a big file inside the PC.
Enabling the log file can be helpful to debug/monitor software activities for troubleshooting activities on
the software operations.

Select Tools → Log management from the menu list:

Full Create a log file containing the following messages: Information, warnings, errors and
fatal errors.
Partial Create a log file containing only warnings, errors and fatal errors.

The log file is added in the Log folder, which is automatically created in the same installation directory of
the ToolsTalk BLM, typically:
C:\Program Files\Atlas Copco Tools AB\Tools Talk BLM\Log

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 75 (383)


Transducers STanalyser User Guide

5 Transducers

The STanalyser can be connected to the following transducers (For ACTA transducer use a standard Atlas
Copco cable):
STanalyser
Tool Crib T Tool Crib T/A Production Residual AA
without RBU
Transducer

IRTT-B and
YES YES YES YES* YES* YES
IRTT

SRTT-B and
YES YES YES Only free mode Only free mode YES
SRTT

SRTT-L YES YES YES - - YES

MRTT-C Only free mode Only free mode Only free mode YES YES YES

QRTT-B YES YES YES YES* YES* YES

MRTT-B and
Only free mode Only free mode Only free mode YES* YES* YES
MRTT

BLM 5015
- Only free mode Only free mode YES* YES* YES
wrench

Other mV/V
torque - YES YES Only free mode Only free mode YES
transducers**
* Can be used with STanalyser Production and Residual, only for test/tightening strategies in only torque,
and not for strategies requiring the angle measurement.
**For other mV/V torque transducers: Range 0.4 mV/V to 2.5 mV/V, bridge resistance 350 to 1000 Ohm.
For transducers with encoder, the input current must be less than 150 mA with +5V power supply.

NOTE: In the various sections of this manual regarding the transducers, it will be mentioned
IRTT-B, SRTT-B, MRTT-B and QRTT-B, giving into account that they can mean also IRTT,
SRTT, MRTT and QRTT.

76 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Transducers

When connecting an ACTA transducer, the STanalyser automatically detects it, and execute the proper
zeroing. The transducers parameters (transducer type, full scale, calibration value, minimum load, serial
number) are automatically read by the STanalyser, without the need of further settings.

Do not apply any torque to the transducer during the “zero torque” (for MRTT-C, leave the unit in a fixed
position during gyroscope zeroing).
NOTE: For SRTT-B transducers. In order to have a proper zeroing of the torque, the lever of
the SRTT-B must be tightened before entering the test mode. However, it is possible to execute
a new zeroing of the torque in the test execution screen, by pressing at the same time the UP
and DOWN arrows on the STanalyser keyboard.

Insert adapter or
joint simulator Lock before enter
the test window

The STanalyser performs a check on the maximum torque applied to the ACTA transducer; if the torque
exceeds the transducer overload specified in the settings, a warning message is displayed during the test
and each time the transducer is connected to the STanalyser:

Press the OK on the STanalyser keyboard to continue the operations; the transducer should be inspected
for possible damages. The overload information is stored inside the memory of the transducer.

WARNING: Never disconnect the transducer from the STanalyser while executing a test; exit
the test execution menu before disconnecting the transducer. This prevents the detection of a
false transducer overload.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 77 (383)


Transducers STanalyser User Guide

5.1 Non-ACTA Transducers Database

This chapter is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.


When an ACTA transducer is connected to the STanalyser it is automatically recognized and its data
loaded. Therefore, there is no need of a transducers database.
For non-ACTA transducers, the data are not read automatically by the instrument; therefore, the
transducers must be defined properly in a database by the ToolsTalk BLM.
For software installation and general usage, see the chapter Working with ToolsTalk BLM.
To access the database, switch on the STanalyser, connect to the PC with ToolsTalk BLM, and select the
Transducers menu into the STanalyser map:

STanalyser map

Toolbar

Non-ACTA transducers
database

Search transducer

 Maximum number of transducers in the database: 20

78 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Transducers

The toolbar in this window provides few commands to edit the transducers database:

Icon Function Icon Function

Create a new transducer to the


Clone the selected transducer
database

Open the selected transducer Copy the selected transducer

Paste the selected transducer on an


Delete the selected transducer existing transducer (overwriting the
parameters)

The search function at the bottom part of the window can be helpful when a large number of transducers
has been added:
Start search
Clear search

Search by
Search by Search by transducer
transducer transducer description
number Serial Number

5.1.1 Adding a transducer to the database

Click on one of the two “Create a new transducer” icon:

Create a new
transducer

Create a new
transducer

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 79 (383)


Transducers STanalyser User Guide

The following window is shown:

Enter the transducer description and serial number and click on OK to proceed to add the transducer data:

Description and Serial Data entered in the previous window. They can be modified here if
Number desired.

Sensitivity Transducer sensitivity for torque. It is important to store the exact value
in order to have the proper torque reading.
Full scale Transducer full scale.

Minimum load Transducer minimum load. Typically it should be set to the 5% of the
transducer full scale.

80 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Transducers

Type Select the transducer type from the list.

Count per revolution For transducer with encoder for angle measurement, this parameter
specifies the encoder pulses per revolution.
Gyro correction coefficient, These parameters are reserved for future upgrade. Transducers with
Torque correction coefficient angle measurement performed by gyroscope are not supported.
and Scale factor

When all the data are entered, click on Store to save.

5.1.2 Selecting the transducer for the test

When a non-ACTA transducer is used, the user must select manually from the database which transducer
is connected to the instrument.

NOTE: When connecting a non-ACTA transducer, the STanalyser does not recognize it
automatically. The user must verify that the correct transducer is connected.

Select Transducer →Transducers DB from the main menu:

STanalyser Tool Crib

STanalyser Production and Residual

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 81 (383)


Transducers STanalyser User Guide

STanalyser AA

Select the transducer from the list, and click on the right arrow to select/deselect it. When selecting a
transducer, the torque zeroing process starts. Do not apply any torque to the transducer during this phase.
At the end of the zeroing process the transducer is selected, and marked with an asterisk:

Transducer
selected

Click on the CL button on the STanalyser keyboard to exit this window. The selected transducer is used
for the tests executed then.

NOTE: When modifying parameters of the transducers in the database, deselect and select
again the transducer, or switch off and switch on again the unit, in order to load the new data.

NOTE: When an ACTA transducer is connected to the STanalyser, the selection made in the
transducer database is cleared, and the ACTA transducer is automatically select for the tests.
Once the ACTA transducer is disconnected, this transducer selection must be performed again.

5.1.3 Transducer information

The Transducer menu of all of the STanalyser versions, except the STanalyser without RBU, provides a
function to display the data of the transducer connected to the STanalyser.
Select Transducer from the main menu, and then Transducer Info:

Example for STanalyser Tool Crib Transducer


data

82 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Transducers

Two of the parameters shown regard the transducer status:


- Torque max: maximum torque applied to the transducer
- Tight. nr: Number of tests executed on the transducer, not including the tests executed in
the free mode.

For MRTT-C, the firmware version is shown in this menu.

5.2 ACTA Transducers Report

This chapter is not applicable to the STanalyser without the RBU.


When an ACTA transducer is connected to the STanalyser, it is possible to show and print a transducer’s
report.
Connect an ACTA transducer to the STanalyser, and double-click on the Connected transducer report
menu in the STanalyser map:

The following report is created:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 83 (383)


Transducers STanalyser User Guide

Toolbar

Transducer
data

The toolbar in the upper part of the window provides few commands for printing or copying the report to
the PC clipboard.

84 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting Started with STanalyser

6 Getting Started with STanalyser


If not already done, assembly the new STanalyser with the items possibly purchased:
- RBU
- QAT Barcode reader module
- QAT IRC-W dual band radio module
- Battery (connect the external power supply if the battery is not purchased)

Cover

RBU
IRC-W
Barcode module
reader

Battery

STanalyser
controller

Press the ON switch on the STanalyser keyboard. The first time of usage, depending from the RBU type
purchased, the following message might be shown on the STanalyser display:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 85 (383)


Getting started with STanalyser STanalyser User Guide

In this case, connect the STanalyser to ToolsTalk BLM, which automatically shows this message:

Click on Yes and follow the instructions to update the firmware loaded in the STanalyser.

During the power on phase, the Atlas Copco logo is shown for few seconds, followed by the zero
adjustment and radio module search screen. During zero adjustment, the STanalyser type and firmware
version is displayed in the upper part of the screen:

STanalyser type
and firmware

Power on screen Zero adjustment

NOTE: The transducer check and “Zero Torque” are performed only if a transducer is
connected to the STanalyser. In that case leave the transducer connected to the STanalyser in a
fixed position without applying any torque to the transducers during the power on; this permits
proper automatic zero adjustment of the transducer.

During the power on phase a self test of the STanalyser LEDs is also performed; all the LEDs are alight in
sequence. At the end of this test, only the STanalyser logo remains alight.

After the power on screen, the main menu is shown on the display. The main menu changes according to
the STanalyser version:

86 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting Started with STanalyser

Main menu for STanalyser without RBU Main menu for Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A

Main menu for STanalyser Production and Residual Main menu for STanalyser AA

To turn off the STanalyser, press the OFF button and hold it down for few seconds.

For details of the main menu functions for the various STanalyser versions, see the next chapters of this
manual.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 87 (383)


Getting started with STanalyser STanalyser User Guide

6.1 Executing a Free Test


The free test conducts a test (track or peak mode) by simply accessing the STanalyser from the keyboard,
with no need to set the test.

NOTE: In this mode the results are not saved in the STanalyser memory.

To conduct a free test:

 STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A: Select Free Mode from the main menu:

STanalyser
Tool Crib T/A

STanalyser
Tool Crib T

 STanalyser Production and Residual: Select Free Mode from the main menu:

STanalyser
Production version

STanalyser Residual
version

88 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting started with STanalyser

 STanalyser without RBU: Select Measurement from the main menu, and the select Free Mode:

 STanalyser AA: Select Free Mode from the main menu:

Select one of the free mode options and click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to start the
test.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 89 (383)


Getting started with STanalyser STanalyser User Guide

6.1.1 Track

This mode can be used to track the torque in real time. The LEDs and buzzer are not activated in this
mode.

Torque

Time

In track mode, the STanalyser simply displays the applied torque in real time.

Torque can be applied in either the clockwise (positive torque) or counterclockwise (negative torque)
direction.

By clicking on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard the STanalyser executes a torque zero
adjustment.
Note that this zero adjustment is applied only for this test and not applied as a global zero reference for the
STanalyser.

90 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting started with STanalyser

6.1.2 Peak

In this mode the torque produced by the wrench or power tool is shown in real time, and the maximum
value reached during tightening remains frozen on the STanalyser display. The LEDs and buzzer are not
activated in this mode.

Torque

Displayed Torque
Applied Torque

Min. Load Time

The STanalyser displays torque (and possibly angle) in real time, starting from the Min. Load value of the
transducer connected to the STanalyser, and the peak value is frozen on the display.

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T Tool Crib T/A, AA, Production, Residual

A new cycle starts when the applied torque is released, and applied again over the Min. Load of the
STanalyser transducer (typically set to the 5% of the transducer capacity).
By clicking on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard the torque value is reset.
The torque must be applied in the clockwise direction.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 91 (383)


Getting started with STanalyser STanalyser User Guide

6.1.3 Tight Torque / Angle

NOTE: This function is available only on the STanalyser Production version.

In this mode the STanalyser executes a tightening operation to the given torque.

Set the desired target torque value by clicking on the UP and DOWN arrows on the STanalyser keyboard
and click the OK button to confirm and execute the tightening.

The current torque and angle values are displayed, starting from the Min. Load value of the smartHEAD
installed in the MRTT-C. Torque must be applied in the clockwise direction.
The greed LED, the vibration device and the buzzer advise the operator that target torque value has been
reached (within 5% of the specified value).

92 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting started with STanalyser

6.1.4 Residual Torque / Time

NOTE: This function is available only on the STanalyser Residual and AA version.

This test evaluates the residual torque on a bolt, using the torque / time method.

Torque Torque

Breakaway Breakaway
Min. Load Time Time

No input parameters are needed; simply apply the torque on the bolt and increase it until it starts moving;
the STanalyser automatically detects the breakaway point. The analysis starts when the applied torque
goes over the Min. Load value.
NOTE: It is very important to execute this operation with a single “steady” movement by the
operator.

The STanalyser displays the torque applied in real time, and freezes the residual torque value when the
breakaway point is detected.
The green LED, and the vibration device (only for MRTT-C, active for 1 second), advise the operator that
the breakaway point has been detected; if not, the red LED is activated.
To start a new test, simply apply torque again; click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to reset
the torque and angle value to zero.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 93 (383)


Getting started with STanalyser STanalyser User Guide

6.1.5 Residual Torque / Angle

NOTE: This function is available only on the STanalyser Residual and AA version.

This test evaluates the residual torque on a bolt using the torque / angle method. Since torque is analyzed
as a function of angle rather than time, this is a more objective method for evaluating residual torque than
the torque / time method.

Torque Torque

Breakaway Breakaway
Min. Load Angle
Angle

This mode is equivalent to the Residual Torque Time mode, except for the fact that the method used to
evaluate the breakaway point is based on the torque/angle trace.

No input parameters are needed; simply apply the torque on the bolt and increase it until it starts moving;
the STanalyser automatically detects the breakaway point. The analysis starts when the applied torque
goes over the Min. Load value.

NOTE: It is very important to execute this operation with a single “steady” movement by the
operator.

The STanalyser displays the torque applied in real time, and freezes the residual torque value when the
breakaway point is detected.

94 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Getting started with STanalyser

The green LED, the buzzer, and the vibration device (only for MRTT-C, active for 1 second), advise the
operator that the breakaway point has been detected; if not, the red LED is activated.
To start a new test, simply apply torque again; click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to reset
the torque and angle value to zero.

6.1.6 Speed

NOTE: This function is available only on the STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A versions.

This test measures the speed of a tool operating on a rotary transducer. The LEDs and buzzer are not
activated in this mode.

The STanalyser shows the real time speed of the tool in RPM (revolutions per minute):

The speed is positive if the tool is rotating clockwise, negative if counterclockwise.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 95 (383)


Use of the STanalyser without RBU STanalyser User Guide

7 Use of the STanalyser without RBU


The STanalyser without RBU is a basic instrument providing a limited set of operations compared to the
versions using the RBU:

 Test of tools and wrenches are executed directly from the main menu; this version does not
support the Pset definition by ToolsTalk BLM
 Batch, Pset, Multistage and Job not supported.
 ToolsTalk BLM cannot create and save the file .sta.
 No transducer database: Only IRTT-B, QRTT-B, SRTT-B and SRTT-L can be connected. The
MRTT-B and MRTT-C can be used as well, but only in the free mode.
 Connection to Torque Supervisor is not available
 The statistics are not grouped by the different tests and not saved when the results are exported to
ToolsTalk BLM.

The main menu is the following:

Measurement Conducts a test of a wrench or a tool, or a free test.

Measurement Setup Defines the setup parameters for the click-wrenches test, power tools test,
peak test, and pulse tools test.
Settings Enter this menu to customize the STanalyser settings.

Results This menu shows all of the results present in the STanalyser memory. See
the Results Viewer chapter for details.
Transducers This menu is used to select the transducer in use and shows a transducer
information window.

NOTE: It is possible to enter automatically a specific test menu, instead of the main menu, after
the power on sequence. See the STanalyser without RBU Settings chapter for details.

96 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser without RBU

7.1 Testing a Tool


When the STanalyser is used without RBU, the test are execute from the main menu without the need of
programming by ToolsTalk BLM.

Select the Measurement menu and then the type of tool you are testing:

The torque result with average, minimum, and maximum values are shown in real time. Starting from the
3rd values also the dispersion value σ (Std) are displayed:

For the details of the formulas used by the STanalyser to calculate the statistics results, see the chapter
Statistics Formulas.

NOTE: When starting a test, if some results are already present in the memory the statistics
parameters are shown:

Press to reset statistics and


delete the results stored.

These results are created by all the tests available on the STanalyser (click-wrench, power tool,
or peak, pulse tool). To reset them (the results are deleted from the STanalyser memory) press
the RESET button on the STanalyser keyboard.

For the details about how the STanalyser performs the test on the various tool, see the chapters Testing
Click-wrenches, Testing Power Tools, Peak Detection Test and Testing Pulse Tools.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 97 (383)


STanalyser without RBU STanalyser User Guide

7.1.1 Test setup

Each kind of test (Click-wrench, Power tool, Peak test and Pulse tool) is configured in the Measurement
Setup menu:

For the details about how these parameters are used by the instrument to test a tool, see the chapters
Testing Click-wrenches, Testing Power Tools, Peak Detection Test and Testing Pulse Tools.

NOTE: For test strategies involving the Cycle Start and Cycle Complete values, the STanalyser
without RBU automatically assign these parameters as follows:

Cycle Start = transducer minimum load


Cycle Start
Cycle Complete =
2

7.2 STanalyser without RBU Settings

7.2.1 STanalyser Display Language


To set the STanalyser display language, select Settings → Language from the STanalyser main menu:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to change the language.


The language can be set also by the ToolsTalk BLM, by selecting the Controller → Configuration menu:

98 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser without RBU

7.2.2 STanalyser Date and Time


To set the STanalyser date and time, select Settings → Insert Date – Time from the STanalyser main
menu:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to set the date and time. The Time is shown on the
STanalyser display, while the Date is only associated to the test results.
The date format (European or American) can be set from the Settings → Date menu.

The language can be set also by the ToolsTalk BLM, by selecting the Controller → Configuration menu:

Click on the icon to synchronize the time with the PC time.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 99 (383)


STanalyser without RBU STanalyser User Guide

7.2.3 Maximum transducer overload


Enter the Settings → Transd. Over from the STanalyser main menu to define the maximum overload for
the transducers connected to the STanalyser:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser to edit the value.


The percentage value specified here is applied to the full scale of the transducer connected to the
STanalyser, to determine the maximum torque applicable to the transducer. It can be set from 90% to
110% of the transducer capacity (the value shown by the STanalyser when the ACTA transducer is
connected, normally higher than the nominal value marked on the transducer).
If during the test the torque goes over the maximum value, the related error message is displayed:

Press the OK button on the STanalyser display to exit this error window.

7.2.4 First menu after STanalyser power on


Enter the Settings → First menu from the STanalyser main menu to define in which menu the STanalyser
enters after the power on sequence:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser to edit the value. With the default value None, the STanalyser
remains in the main menu after the power on sequence. If selecting a different menu, the STanalyser
enters that menu automatically. The possible choices are one of the measurement menus (Click, Power,
Peak or Pulse) or one of the two free mode submenus (Track Free or Peak Free).

100 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser without RBU

NOTE: To enter automatically a test menu, a valid transducer must be connected to the
STanalyser before the power on. If no transducer is connected, the STanalyser shows an error
message, and it enters then the Free mode menu (if Track Free or Peak Free is selected) or the
Measurement menu (if Click, Power, Peak or Pulse is selected).

7.2.5 Restore factory settings


Enter the Settings → Reset all settings from the STanalyser main menu to restore the factory settings:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser to enter:

Click on OK to restore the factory settings, including all the settings for the tool testing defined in the
Measurement Setup function from the main menu.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 101 (383)


STanalyser without RBU STanalyser User Guide

7.2.6 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser

Select the Controller → Configuration menu in ToolsTalk BLM, and select


then Result fields:

Results field

Select three fields to be displayed in the Results option of the STanalyser


main menu.

102 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

8 STanalyser Tool Crib

The STanalyser Tool Crib versions (Tool Crib T, Tool Crib T/A) are devices developed for the tools
testing.
The Tool Crib T measures only the torque, while the Tool Crib T/A measures also the angle.

STanalyser
with RBU Tool Crib Barcode reader

IRC-W
connection

NOTE: The STanalyser AA version also supports all of the features available in the Tool Crib
T/A version. See also the STanalyser AA (Advanced Analysis) chapter for details of the AA
version.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 103 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.1 Use of the STanalyser Tool Crib T

The STanalyser Tool Crib T is an instrument developed to test tools and wrenches. The tests must be
programmed by the ToolsTalk BLM, which can retrieve the test results.
The main menu is the following:

Free Mode Conducts a free test, without the need of programming the STanalyser with ToolsTalk
BLM.
Tools This menu contains the list of tools to be tested by the STanalyser. The tools and related
Pset must be defined with ToolsTalk BLM. See the next paragraphs for details

Settings Enter this menu to customize the STanalyser settings.

Results This menu shows all of the results present in the STanalyser memory. See the Results
Viewer chapter for details.
Transducers This menu permits to add non-ACTA transducers, and to select it for the tests. Also, a
window with the transducer data is available. See the chapter Transducers for details.

NOTE: It is possible to activate an extra menu “Route” (and also possible to disable the
“Tools” menu), for the use of the STanalyser in conjunction with Torque Supervisor. See the
Working with Torque Supervisor chapter for details

104 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.1.1 Testing a tool

To test a tool with the STanalyser Tool Crib T, the following sequence is required:

1. Create one (or more) Pset containing the test data for the tool to be tested.
2. Create a tool, and associate to it the Pset(s).
3. Test the tool.

8.1.1.1 Creating a Pset

Connect the STanalyser to the ToolsTalk BLM.

There are three ways to add a new Pset:

Click to create
Click to Pset
create Pset

Toolbar

Right-click to
create Pset

Search Pset by number or


name

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 105 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

The Toolbar in the Pset menu provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Clone the selected Pset (create a new


Create a new Pset to the database
Pset)

Open the selected Pset Copy the selected Pset

Delete the selected Pset. To delete a


Pset, it must be not associated to any Paste the selected Pset on an existing
tool. Pset (overwriting the parameters)

For all the details about the Pset parameters, see the Pset chapter.

106 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.1.1.2 Creating a Tool

Connect the STanalyser to the ToolsTalk BLM.

There are three ways to add a new tool:


Click to create
a new tool
Click to create
a new tool

Toolbar

List of tools
Right-click to already created
create a Tool

Search Tool by number or


name

It is possible to add up to 1000 tools (stored in the RBU).

The Toolbar in the Tool menu provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Clone the selected Tool (create a new


Create a new Tool to the database
Tool)

Open the selected Tool Copy the selected Tool

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 107 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

Delete the selected Tool. To delete a


Tool, it must be not associated to any Paste the selected Tool on an existing
tool. Tool (overwriting the parameters)

Click on the Create a Tool icon, or right-click on the Tool menu, to create a new tool:

Enter the Code (progressive number shown on the left column of the tool list), the Description and Serial
Number, and click on OK to continue:

Description and Serial Tool data just entered when the new tool is created. It is possible to modify
Number them here.

108 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Type Select the tool type from the list.

Minimum torque and These two values are just information data of the tool, and they are not used
Maximum torque by the STanalyser for the test and statistics.
Unit of measurement Select the measurement unit from the list.

Pulse target For pulse tools, specifies the tool frequency (pulses per seconds). This is an
information field, and it is not used for calculating results and statistics.
Pset linked to the Tool To test a tool on the STanalyser, a Pset must be associated. If not already
done, defined a Pset first in the specific Pset menu. Associate in this
window one (or more) Pset to be used to test the tool.

Click on to link a Pset to the tool. Click on to remove it.

If more than one Pset is associated to the tool, the selection of the Pset used
for the test is done at the time of the test.

It is possible to associate a maximum number of 5 Pset to each tool.

8.1.1.3 Executing the test

Once the tool is created and the related Pset(s) associated, the tool is shown in the Tools menu of the
STanalyser.
Connect first a transducer to the STanalyser.
Select the Tools menu, then select the tool to be tested, and finally the Pset to be used to test the tool:

The torque result with average, minimum, and maximum values are shown in real time. Starting from the
3rd values also the standard deviation σ (Std) are displayed:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 109 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

The statistics are reset each time a new batch is started.


The batch count is shown in the bottom-right corner of the display. It is incremented after each test. If the
click-point (for click-wrenches) or the peak point (for power tool) is not detected, the batch count is not
incremented (but the result is stored in the memory).

NOTE: It is possible to activate a function which, after each test or only after a Not OK test,
asks the user if the result must be acquired (and batch count incremented) or not (and batch
count not incremented, but result stored in the memory). See the chapter Enabling the result
confirmation for details.

For the details of the formulas used by the STanalyser to calculate the statistics results, see the chapter
Statistics Formulas.

NOTE: The choice of the four statistical parameters to be displayed can be customized as
preferred by the user. See the STanalyser Tool Crib Settings chapter for details.

For the details about how the STanalyser performs the test on the various tool, see the chapters Testing
Click-wrenches, Testing Power Tools, Peak Detection Test and Testing Pulse Tools.

8.2 Use of the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A

The STanalyser Tool Crib T/A is an instrument developed to test tools and wrenches, measuring the
torque and the angle.
The tests on the tools can be programmed in order to verify only the torque, only the angle, or both of
them. See the chapter Pset for details. When the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A is programmed by Torque
Supervisor, the test can be executed in “only torque” or “only angle”, while the “torque and angle” option
is not supported.
The tests must be programmed by the ToolsTalk BLM, which can retrieve the test results.
The main menu is the following:

110 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Free Mode Conducts a free test, without the need of programming the STanalyser with
ToolsTalk BLM.
Tools This menu contains the list of tools to be tested by the STanalyser. The tools
and related Pset must be defined with ToolsTalk BLM. See the next
paragraphs for details

Transducers This menu permits to view the information of the transducer connected (for
ACTA transducer), or to select a non-ACTA transducer for the tests. See the
chapter Transducers for details.

Settings Enter this menu to customize the STanalyser settings.

Results This menu shows all of the results present in the STanalyser memory. See
the Results Viewer chapter for details.

NOTE: It is possible to activate an extra menu “Route” (and also possible to disable the
“Tools” menu), for the use of the STanalyser in conjunction with Torque Supervisor. See the
Working with Torque Supervisor chapter for details.

8.2.1 Testing a tool

To test a tool with the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A, the following sequence is required:

1. Create one (or more) Pset containing the test data for the tool to be tested.
2. Create a tool, and associate to it the Pset(s).
3. Test the tool.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 111 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.2.1.1 Creating a Pset


Connect the STanalyser to the ToolsTalk BLM.

There are three ways to add a new Pset:

Click to create
Click to Pset
create Pset

Toolbar

Right-click to
create Pset.

Search Pset by number or


name

The Toolbar in the Pset menu provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Clone the selected Pset (create a new


Create a new Pset to the database
Pset)

Open the selected Pset Copy the selected Pset

Delete the selected Pset. To delete a


Pset, it must be not associated to any Paste the selected Pset on an existing
tool. Pset (overwriting the parameters)

112 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

For more information about the Pset parameters, see the Pset chapter.

8.2.1.2 Creating a Tool


Connect the STanalyser to the ToolsTalk BLM.

There are three ways to add a new tool:


Click to create
a new tool

Click to create
a new tool

Toolbar

List of tools
Right-click to already created
create a Tool

Search Tool by number or


name

It is possible to add up to 1000 tools (stored in the RBU).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 113 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

The Toolbar in the Tool menu provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Clone the selected Tool (create a new


Create a new Tool to the database
Tool)

Open the selected Tool Copy the selected Tool

Delete the selected Tool. To delete a


Tool, it must be not associated to any Paste the selected Tool on an existing
tool. Tool (overwriting the parameters)

Click on the Create a Tool icon, or right-click on the Tool menu, to create a new tool:

Enter the Code (progressive number appearing on the left column of the tool list), the Description and
Serial Number, and click on OK to continue:

114 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Description and Serial Tool data just entered when the new tool is created. It is possible to modify
Number them here.
Type Select the tool type from the list.

Minimum torque and These two values are just information data of the tool, and they are not used
Maximum torque by the STanalyser for the test and statistics.
Unit of measurement Select the measurement unit from the list.

Pulse target For pulse tools, specifies the tool frequency (pulses per seconds). This is an
information field, and it is not used for calculating results and statistics.
Pset linked to the Tool To test a tool on the STanalyser, a Pset must be associated. If not already
done, defined a Pset first in the specific Pset menu. Associate in this
window one (or more) Pset to be used to test the tool.

Click on to link a Pset to the tool. Click on to remove it.

If more than one Pset is associated to the tool, the selection of the Pset used
for the test is done at the time of the test.

It is possible to associate a maximum number of 5 Pset to each tool.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 115 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.2.1.3 Executing the test

Once the tool is created and the related Pset(s) associated, the tool is shown in the Tools menu of the
STanalyser.
Connect first a transducer to the STanalyser.
Select the Tools menu, then select the tool to be tested, and finally the Pset to be used to test the tool:

The torque and angle results are shown in real time.

NOTE: The angle value is not shown if connecting a static transducer and the Pset is set to
measure only the torque. If the Pset is set to measure also the angle, an error is shown if the
transducer connected does not provide angle measurement.

The batch count is shown in the bottom-right corner of the display. It is incremented after each test. If the
click-point (for click-wrenches) or the peak point (for power tool) is not detected, the batch count is not
incremented (but the result is stored in the memory).

NOTE: It is possible to activate a function which, after each test or only after a Not OK test,
asks the user if the result must be acquired (and batch count incremented) or not (and batch
count not incremented, but result stored in the memory). See the chapter Enabling the result
confirmation for details.

For Psets with a batch size greater than one, click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to display
the real time statistics:

116 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The four statistics parameter shown in this “Statistics” menu can be customized in the settings (see the
chapter STanalyser Tool Crib Settings for details). Some of these parameters (for example Standard
deviation, Cm, and Cmk) are shown starting from the 3rd test.
Select Torque to show a more detailed set of statistics for the torque:

Click on CL on the STanalyser keyboard to go back to the previous Statistics screen.

Select Angle to display the same set of statistics for the angle:

The statistics are reset each time a new batch is started.

Click on Back (or click on CL button) to go back to the ongoing Pset.


For the details of the formulas used by the STanalyser to calculate the statistics results, see the chapter
Statistics Formulas.

NOTE: The choice of the four statistical parameters to be displayed can be customized as
preferred by the user. See the STanalyser Tool Crib Settings chapter for details.

For the details about how the STanalyser performs the test on the various tool, see the chapters Testing
Click-wrenches, Testing Power Tools, Peak Detection Test and Testing Pulse Tools.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 117 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.2.2 Angle test


The angle test function can be used to make tests to compare the angle measured by the tool (for such
tools providing the angle measurement, for example Power Focus) with a reference transducer connected
to the STanalyser (for example IRTT-B).

In this test the STanalyser does not require a minimum load to start the angle measurement; therefore, the
IRTT-B can be left fully free to rotate, or installed on the joint simulator in case the tool under test needs a
certain minimum load.

To perform the test, follow this procedure:


1. Define in the STanalyser a Pset with control strategy “only angle” via ToolsTalk BLM:

118 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Only angle

2. Create a tool (with type power tool), and associate the Pset to the tool:

3. Start the test.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 119 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

During the test, the STanalyser shows the angle measured:

During the test, press the UP button on the STanalyser keyboard to reset the angle value; this can be used
to synchronize the angle measurement between the STanalyser and the tool.
The specific parameters available in the “only angle” Pset are the following:
Minimum angle and Angle limits for having OK result.
Maximum angle
Minimum Cm and Minimum Cm and Cmk for having OK result.
Minimum Cmk
End cycle time This parameter defines the end of the test. When no rotation is detected for
the specified timeout, the test ends. The default value is 300 msec.
Tool tightening direction Select if the test is performed clockwise or counterclockwise.

120 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.2.3 Power Focus calibration

The STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A feature the Power Focus calibration function.
Requirements:
- Power Focus minimum version: All Power Focus version can be calibrated (minimum
version tested 10.9)
- STanalyser external power supply
- STanalyser Docking Station
- ACTA serial cable or 8059 0949 56
- SRTT-B or IRTT-B or QRTT-B or SRTT-L, with mechanical joint simulator

The system must be connected as follows:

Power Focus

Joint simulator

SRTT-B or IRTT-B or
QRTT-B or SRTT-L

STanalyser power
supply

ACTA serial
cable

STanalyser
docking station

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 121 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

The Power Focus must operate on an IRTT-B or SRTT-B or SRTT-L or QRTT-B with mechanical joint
simulator.
The transducer and the mechanical joint simulator capacities must be compatible with the torque at which
the Power Focus is calibrated.

To perform the Power Focus torque calibration, execute the following procedure:

1. Connect the system as shown in the figure above. The Power Focus COM port and the STanalyser
docking station must be connected via ACTA serial cable with a gender-changer.

2. Switch on the STanalyser and the Power Focus.

3. Select or create a Pset on Power Focus with the following characteristics:

- Cycle start value over the SRTT-B / IRTT-B / QRTT-B / SRTT-L minimum load.
- Target torque less than the SRTT-B / IRTT-B / QRTT-B / SRTT-L capacity.
- The batch size defines the number of tests for the calibration. A batch size of seven is
suggested.

4. On the STanalyser, create a Pset with both the minimum and maximum torque parameters set to
the same value of the Pset created in Power Focus. Set the following parameters as shown in the
figure:

5. On the STanalyser, create a tool with the serial number of the tool under calibration. Associate the
Pset to the Tool:

122 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

6. From the Tools menu on the STanalyser, start the test on the tool just created.

7. The following sequence is shown on the STanalyser display:

Batch counter

In case of error, one of the following messages might be shown on the STanalyser:
- Communication error: Check the connection between STanalyser and Power Focus
- Pset mismatch: Check the Pset parameters
- Tool mismatch: Check the tool serial number

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 123 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8. Execute the number of tightening shown on the batch counter. The STanalyser shows both its
torque results and the Power Focus results:

Torque from
Power Focus
Torque from
STanalyser

9. When the batch is completed, the following summary is shown:

New and old


calibration value

The message Tool OK is given if the new calibration value is within ±5% of the old
calibration value; the message Tool Not OK is given otherwise.

10. Press the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to save the new calibration value inside Power
Focus. Press CL to quit without saving the new coefficient.

11. After saving the new calibration value, double check that the new value is stored inside Power
Focus.

12. The results are stored in the Results Viewer menu of ToolsTalk BLM. Select the batch of interest
of the calibration Pset, and click on Power Focus Calibration Report:

Report

Batch number
Select a batch

124 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

13. The following report is created:

The message Tool OK in the test comment is given if the new calibration value is within ±5% of the old
calibration value; the message Tool Not OK is given otherwise.

The toolbar on the top of the report window provides commands to print or export the report to Excel or
PDF file.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 125 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.2.4 PowerMACS calibration

The STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A feature the PowerMACS calibration function.
Requirements:
- PowerMACS minimum version: All Power Focus version can be calibrated (minimum
version tested 3.1.0)
- STanalyser external power supply
- STanalyser Docking Station
- Serial cable:
PowerMACS Classic: 4145 0973 03 or 4145 0974 03
PowerMACS 4000: 8059 0949 56
- SRTT-B or IRTT-B or QRTT-B or SRTT-L, with mechanical joint simulator

The system must be connected as following:

PowerMACS

Joint simulator
Serial cable

SRTT-B or IRTT-B or
QRTT-B or SRTT-L

STanalyser power
supply

STanalyser
docking station

126 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The PowerMACS spindle should be attached to the IRTT-B or SRTT-B or QRTT-B or SRTT-L with
mechanical joint simulator by using a fixture holding the pieces together.
The transducer and mechanical joint simulator capacities must be compatible with the torque at which the
PowerMACS spindle is calibrated.

To perform the PowerMACS torque calibration, execute the following procedure:

1. Switch on the STanalyser and the Power Focus.

WARNING: It is very important to switch on the devices before connecting them


together; risk of hardware damage otherwise.

2. With the instruments already powered on, connect the system as shown in the figure above. Use
the PowerMACS COM port 2, and connect to the STanalyser docking station via serial cable with
a gender-changer.

3. Enable the calibration function with Win TC on the PowerMACS, adding the ACTA 3000 (the
STanalyser uses the same interface of ACTA 3000 to calibrate the PowerMACS), and set the
COM port 2:

This figure is for reference only. See the PowerMACS user guide for
details of PowerMACS setup.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 127 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

4. On the STanalyser, create a Pset with both the minimum and maximum torque values set to the
target torque for the calibration. Set the following parameters as shown in the figure below, and
the Spindle number according to which spindle must be calibrated:

5. On the STanalyser, create a tool and associate the Pset to the Tool:

6. From the Tools menu on the STanalyser, start the test on the tool just created.

128 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

7. The following sequence is shown on the STanalyser display:

Batch counter

In case of error, one of the following messages might be shown on the STanalyser:
- Communication error: Check the connection between STanalyser and PowerMACS
- Pset mismatch: Check the Pset parameters
- Tool mismatch: Check the tool serial number

8. The PowerMACS executes the tests automatically:

Torque from Torque from


STanalyser PowerMACS

9. Wait until the batch is completed and the following summary is shown:

New and old


calibration value

The message Tool OK is given if the new calibration value is within ±5% of the old
calibration value; the message Tool Not OK is given otherwise.

10. Press the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to save the new calibration value inside
PowerMACS. Press CL to quit without saving the new coefficient.

11. After saving the new calibration value, double check that the new value is stored inside
PowerMACS.

14. The results are stored in the Results Viewer menu of ToolsTalk BLM. Select the batch of interest
of the calibration Pset, and click on PowerMACS Calibration Report:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 129 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

Report

Select a batch
Batch number

15. The following report is created:

130 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The message Tool OK in the test comment is given if the new calibration value is within ±5% of the old
calibration value; the message Tool Not OK is given otherwise.

The toolbar on the top of the report window provides commands to print or export the report to Excel or
PDF file.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 131 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.3 Pset for Tool Crib


The set of parameters that controls a test process is contained within a so-called Pset. This section
describes how to setup the Pset parameters necessary to perform a test.

The STanalyser can store up to 1000 Pset in the RBU.

There are three ways to add a new Pset:

Click to create
Pset

Click to create
Pset

Toolbar

Right-click to
create Pset

Search Pset by number or


name

The Toolbar in the Pset menu provides the following commands:

Icon Function Icon Function

Clone the selected Pset (create a new


Create a new Pset to the database
Pset)

132 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Open the selected Pset Copy the selected Pset

Delete the selected Pset. To delete a


Pset, it must be not associated to any Paste the selected Pset on an existing
tool. Pset (overwriting the parameters)

When a new Pset is created, the following window is shown:

Enter the Pset Number and Name and click on OK to continue configuring the Pset. Configure the various
parameters shown in the next paragraphs, and at the end click on Store to confirm.

8.3.1 Main parameters and control strategy

Pset name Pset name just entered when creating it. It is possible to change it here
anyway.
Transducer and These fields are optional. If Transducer required is enabled, the Pset is
Transducer required executed only if the specified Transducer serial number is connected to the
STanalyser.
For ACTA transducers, enter manually the serial number.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 133 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

For non-ACTA transducer, click on the icon and select a transducer


defined before in the Transducers Database. For non-ACTA transducer, the
STanalyser cannot read automatically the serial number; therefore, at the
time of the test the user has to connect the right transducer.

For ACTA transducers, if a Pset is started without a transducer connected,


or with an ACTA transducer different from the one specified, the following
message is displayed:

Control strategy Select the strategy from the list.

Note that if a Pset is already linked to any tool, it is not possible to modify
the control strategy:

To modify the control strategy all of the association of the Pset with tools
must be removed.

Check type This parameter is reserved for the Tool Crib T/A version only.
When the Control strategy is set to Power Tool or Peak, this parameter
define what it is considered by the STanalyser for the OK or Not OK result:

- Only torque: To have an OK result, the torque must be within the limits
(regardless the angle result).
- Only angle: To have an OK result, the angle must be within the limits
(regardless the torque result).
- Torque and angle: To have an OK result, both the torque and the angle
must be within the limits.

Test type Cm-Cmk: Select this option to test the tool capability.
Calibration: Select this option to calibrate the tool controller (such as Power
Focus or PowerMACS).

134 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

This parameter is active only for Power Tool control strategy.

Controller type For Test type set to Calibration, select between Power Focus and
PowerMACS.
Spindle number For Controller type set to PowerMACS, select the spindle to be calibrated.

8.3.2 Torque parameters

Cycle complete This parameter is active for Click wrench, Power Tool and ACTA Pulse
Tools control strategy. When the torque goes and remains under this value
for longer than the End time parameter, the test ends.
For STanalyser without RBU, this value is automatically set to the half of
the cycle start value.

A value equal to the half of the transducer minimum load is recommended.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 135 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

Cycle Start Torque value from which to start the test.


This must be higher than the transducer Minimum Load value; if not, when
the Pset is started the following error message is shown:

If left to zero, the STanalyser assigns automatically to the Cycle Start the
transducer minimum load.
For STanalyser without RBU, the Cycle Start is automatically set to the
transducer minimum load.

Start final angle For control strategies involving the angle measurement, specifies the torque
value from which to start the angle measurement.
Minimum torque Torque limit value (low) to have an OK result.

Maximum torque Torque limit value (high) to have an OK result

Unit of measurement Select the desired unit.

Minimum Cm and Minimum value for the Cm and Cmk. If the test gives a Cm or Cmk value
Minimum Cmk lower than the minimum value, the test is marked as Not OK.

NOTE: These parameters are not considered if the torque is not selected as
measure to be considered for the result in the main control parameters of the
Pset.

Advanced settings: % first


threshold , % second
threshold, slip torque,
autodetect slip torque
value.

136 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The use of the two thresholds depends from the Pset control strategy. See
the specific chapters (Testing Click-wrenches, Testing Power Tools, Peak
Detection Test and Testing Pulse Tools) to a detailed explanation of these
thresholds in the various control strategies.

For click-wrench test, the two thresholds are used only for STanalyser
version before 7.5. For newer versions, they are substituted by the slip
torque and autodetect slip torque value; see the Testing Click-wrenches
chapter for details.

For power tool test, the two thresholds are used only for STanalyser version
before 7.6. For newer versions, they are not available; see the Testing Power
Tools chapter for details.

Torque coefficient This field is active only for pulse tools, and it is used to correct the torque
value read by the STanalyser in order to match the real torque provided by
the pulse tool on the joint (residual torque). For a detailed explanation of the
test of a pulse tool, and how to calculate this parameter, see the chapter
Testing Pulse Tools.

Measure Torque at Select between Torque Peak and Angle Peak (active only for Power Tool
test strategy):

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 137 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.3.3 Angle parameters

The angle parameters are active only for Tool Crib T/A version, and for the control strategies Power Tool
and Peak.

Minimum angle Angle limit value (low) to have an OK result.

Maximum angle Angle limit value (high) to have an OK result.

Minimum Cm and Minimum value for the Cm and Cmk. If the test gives a Cm or Cmk value
Minimum Cmk lower than the minimum value, the test is marked as Not OK.

NOTE: These parameters are not considered if the angle is not selected as
measure to be considered for the result in the main control parameters of the
Pset.

138 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.3.4 Timeout

Measure delay time This parameter is active only for Click Wrench and ACTA Pulse Tools
control strategy. It defines a delay time applied when the torque applied
reaches the Cycle start value. During this delay time, the torque is not
considered.

Reset time This parameter is active only for Click Wrench and ACTA Pulse Tools
control strategy. After a torque peak is measured, the STanalyser does not
consider the torque trace during this Reset time. It can be helpful to filter the
bounces occurring in the pulse tool test.

End cycle time The STanalyser ends the test when the torque drops beneath the Cycle Start
value for a longer time than the timer. The default value is 0.1 second.
Minimum value: 0.1 Sec
Maximum value: 5 Sec

Torque

Cycle start
Time

End cycle time

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 139 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.3.5 Batch parameters

Batch steps Enable this flag to activate the batch on the Pset.

Batch size If the Batch steps is enabled, this parameter specifies how many times the
Pset is executed. Typically, the batch function is set to execute a Cm-Cmk
test.
Maximum value: 99

8.3.6 Pulse parameters

These parameters are active only for the Pulse Tool control strategy.

140 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Minimum pulse and For pulse tools, these values are used to calculate the Cm-Cmk related to the
Maximum pulse number of pulses per second.

8.3.7 Options

Filter frequency Select the filter frequency. This filter is applied to the torque samples
measured by the STanalyser.

Peak Active only for Click Wrench strategy for STanalyser version before 7.5.
Select if the result must be the torque value measured on the click-point
detected by the STanalyser, or the absolute peak measured during the test.

Tool tightening direction Select between:

 CW: The test must be executed in the clockwise direction


 CCW: The test must be executed in the counterclockwise direction
CW and CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When
the torque goes over the minimum load, the test is started considering
positive the torque in the direction of the torque applied. Therefore, if
executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 141 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

tests clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results
give a positive torque in the results.

Barcode required If this option is enabled, when the Pset is started the STanalyser requires to
scan a barcode.
The source program should be not set to Barcode (otherwise, this option is
ignored); to start a Pset automatically with a barcode scanning, see the
Settings the program source chapter.

See the Identifier chapter for how to specify the barcode string and to
associate the barcode scanned to the results of the test.

8.4 Linearity Check


The linearity check function evaluates the linearity of the transducer connected to the STanalyser (IRTT-B
or QRTT-B or SRTT-B or SRTT-L).
This test consists in a series of five tests at different torque values, in order to evaluate the linearity of the
transducer across its range. The five points can be chosen as preferred; however, it is recommended to
perform the five tests at the 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% of the transducer capacity.
The torque must be applied to the transducer under test with a valid torque reference system; for instance,
by torque calibration equipment:

To perform the linearity check test, select the Transducers → Linear. Check menu:

142 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The following window is shown:

Apply the torque with a reference load on the transducer, and press the OK button on the STanalyser
keyboard. The following window is shown:

Enter the value of the load applied to the transducer (true value), and press OK on the STanalyser
keyboard to confirm.
Repeat the last two steps till completing the five steps required by the procedure.
A final message is shown on the display for few seconds to indicate the end of the procedure:

To view the results of the linearity check test, connect the STanalyser to the ToolsTalk BLM, and select
the Controller → Linearity check report menu:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 143 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

or

The following report is shown. The last ten reports are stored in the STanalyser memory:

Select a report

Torque
calibration
value

Report
Unlinear (%)

True values Measured


values

144 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

The toolbar in the upper part of the report provides commands to print or to save/export the report to an
Excel or PDF file.

The formula used to calculate the Unlinear (%) value is:

MeasuredValue − TrueValue
Unlinear (%) = × 100
TorqueCalibrationValue

Where:

• Measured Value = Torque value measured by the transducer


• True Value = Torque value of the load applied to the transducer
• Torque Calibration Value = Transducer calibration value (value specified in the memory chip of
the transducer, which can be different from the nominal capacity marked on the transducer).

8.5 STanalyser Tool Crib Settings

8.5.1 STanalyser Display Language


To set the STanalyser display language, select Settings → Language from the STanalyser main menu:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to change the language.


(The language can be set also by the ToolsTalk BLM. See the chapter Setting the STanalyser display
language for details).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 145 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.5.2 STanalyser Date and Time


To set the STanalyser date and time, select Settings → Insert Date – Time from the STanalyser main
menu:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to set the date and time. The Time is shown on the
STanalyser display, while the Date is only associated to the test results.
The date format (European or American) can be set from the Settings → Date menu.

8.5.3 Transducer overload


Enter the Settings → Transd. Over from the STanalyser main menu to define the maximum overload for
the transducers connected to the STanalyser; this value is referred as a percentage of the full scale value:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser to edit the value.


The percentage value specified here is applied to the full scale of the transducer connected to the
STanalyser, to determine the maximum torque applicable to the transducer. It can be set from 90% to
110% of the transducer capacity (the value shown by the STanalyser when the ACTA transducer is
connected, normally higher than the nominal value marked on the transducer).

If during the test the torque goes over the maximum value, the related error message is displayed:

Press the OK button on the STanalyser display to exit this error window.

146 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.5.4 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Stat


These four settings select the four statistical parameters to be shown on the display in the Statistics menu.
This selection affects only that window, and not the test results and statistics.

Select Settings → 1st Stat / 2nd Stat / 3rd Stat / 4th Stat, and choose the four parameters.

The possible options are:

 Minimum value (Min)


 Maximum value (Max)
 Average value (Avg)
 Standard deviation (Std)
 Cm
 Cmk.

For pulse tools, it is also possible to choose the following:

 Pulses/second minimum (P. min)


 Pulses/second maximum (P. Max)
 Pulses per second average (P. Avg)
 Pulses per second deviation standard (P. Std)
 Pulses per second Cm (P. Cm)
 Pulses per second Cmk (P. Cmk)
 Pulses per second (P./sec)

It is possible also to set these statistic options by ToolsTalk BLM, in the Controller → Configuration
menu.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 147 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.5.5 STanalyser Tool Crib controller setup

In the Controller section of the STanalyser Map you can access the STanalyser settings:

NOTE: While performing STanalyser settings by ToolsTalk BLM, leave the STanalyser in the
main menu, and do not enter any menu until settings are completed and stored in the
STanalyser.

148 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.5.5.1 Configuration

8.5.5.1.1 Settings STanalyser name

Name Name which is reported in the STanalyser Map.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 149 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.5.5.1.2 Settings STanalyser date and time

The time is shown on the main menu of the STanalyser display. The
date and time are associated to the tightening results.

Date and time


Click on to align the STanalyser date and time to the date and
time of your PC connected to the STanalyser.

8.5.5.1.3 Settings the program source

This option defines how the test program (Pset) is selected and
started.
Source program
Select Keyboard for normal STanalyser operations; select API for
applications where the STanalyser is driven by API.

8.5.5.1.4 Setting the STanalyser display language

Language Select the language of the STanalyser menu.

8.5.5.1.5 Enabling the result confirmation

Select between:

 Never: All of the tests executed are acquired as test result.


 Always: At the end of each test, the STanalyser asks if the result
Result confirmation option must be considered or discarded.
 NOK only: At the end of each Not OK test, the STanalyser asks if
the result must be considered or discarded.

The result confirmation is shown as follow on the display:

150 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

Click on OK on the STanalyser keyboard to accept it, or CL to


discard. If the result is discarded, the batch count (if enabled) is not
incremented.

8.5.5.1.6 Enabling the batch result

Select between:

 Never: When the batch is completed the STanalyser continues to


execute a new batch.
 Always: When the batch is completed the STanalyser shows a
summary, before to continue with a new batch.
 NOK only: Only if the batch is completed with Not OK result,
the STanalyser shows a summary, before to continue with a new
batch.

The batch summary is shown as following:

Batch result summary

Click on OK to exit
Click on Back to continue:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 151 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.5.5.1.7 Enabling Tools and Route functions on STanalyser main menu

This parameter enables the Tools and Route function on the


STanalyser main menu:

- Only tools: Enable the Tools and disable the Route menus.
Recommended for operations without Torque
Supervisor.
Test menu configuration - Only route: Enable the Route and disable the Tools menus.
Recommended for operations with Torque
Supervisor.
- Both: Enable both the Tools and Route menus. In this mode the
tools created by ToolsTalk BLM are copied also in the Route
menu. However, the Route menu should be used only when
the route of test is coming from Torque Supervisor (see the
Working with Torque Supervisor chapter for details).

When a route is sent by Torque Supervisor, this parameter is


automatically set to Only route; if, after that, this parameter is set to
Both, the tools sent with the route from Torque Supervisor are present
also in the Tools menu.

8.5.5.1.8 Enabling the warning message for full memory

Enabling this option, the STanalyser will advice the user when the
memory is getting full of results. When the memory gets full, the
newest results overwrite the oldest results; oldest results are deleted
and no longer available.
Warning on buffer results full
If this option is enabled, the field Threshold specifies when the
warning message is displayed. For example, settings the threshold to
10, the warning message is shown when the memory reach the value
5000 maximum results – threshold = 4990 results.

152 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.5.5.1.9 Settings the statistics displayed during the test

Statistic options Set the four statistic parameters to be displayed during the test.

8.5.5.1.10 Selecting frequency or pulses for pulse tools test

Select Frequency (pulses per second) or Number of pulses (total


Pulse options number of pulses) to chose what to show during the pulse tools test.

8.5.5.1.11 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser

Results field

Select three fields to be displayed in the Results option of the STanalyser main
menu.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 153 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

8.5.5.2 Information

This window provides some general information, like serial number, firmware version and battery charge
status:

If the IRC-W module is installed, some relevant information is also displayed.

8.5.5.3 ToolsNet

This menu is used to configure the connection to ToolsNet. See the Working with ToolsNet chapter for
details.

8.5.5.4 IRC-W API Settings

This menu is used to configure the connection to the API. See the Working with the API chapter for
details.

154 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.5.5.5 Memory

From this menu is possible to delete the objects stored into the STanalyser RBU and memory and set the
trace maximum number and length.

In the Configuration →Traces settings menu, you can customize the number and size of the tightening
traces saved in the STanalyser memory. By decreasing the number of traces manageable, the maximum
length of each trace (corresponding duration) increases. The maximum trace length depends from the test
strategy.
These are the options available:

Number or Traces Maximum length of each trace (second)


Pulse Tools /
Peak Click Wrench Power Tool ACTA Pulse
Tools
10 30 15 6 12

5 60 30 12 24

3 90 45 18 36

2 150 75 30 60

1 300 150 60 120

The default value is 10 traces, maximum 30 seconds length each.

NOTE: When decreasing the number of traces manageable, the traces possibly stored in the
STanalyser memory get deleted.

Click on Apply in the window above to store the setting.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 155 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

Select the Reset tab to erase the following objects from the RBU / STanalyser memory:

Memory transducer Erase all of the transducers defined into the Transducers Database (stored into
the RBU).

Psets Erase all of the Pset stored into the RBU.

Tools Erase all of the tools stored into the RBU.

Results Erase all of the results stored into the STanalyser memory.

Traces Erase all of the traces stored into the STanalyser memory.

156 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Tool Crib

8.5.5.6 Ethernet configuration

From this menu is possible to configure the network parameters to connect the STanalyser to ToolsTalk
BLM, Torque Supervisor and API. See the Connecting to the STanalyser, Working with Torque
Supervisor and Working with the API chapters for details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 157 (383)


STanalyser Tool Crib STanalyser User Guide

9 Tool testing (Tool Crib T and T/A,


STanalyser without RBU, AA)

9.1 Testing Click-wrenches

A click-wrench is typically tested on a SRTT-B or SRTT-L:

SRTT-B

SRTT-L

The goal of this test is to detect the “click-point” of the wrench.

158 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

Torque

Click-point

Time

The click-point is detected when the torque drops and then increases again, producing thus the typical
shape of the “click” phenomenon, as shown in the two examples following:

Click-point
Click-point

If the torque only drops to zero (without increasing again) after a peak point (as shown in the next figure),
that is not detected as click point. For this reason, slip-wrenches cannot be tested with this method (slip-
wrenches should be tested with the Peak Detection Test):
Torque
This point will be not
detected as click point.

Time

If the test ends and the click-point is not detected, a message “not detected” is shown at the bottom-left
area of the display. In that case the result is the torque absolute peak.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 159 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

At the end of each test the torque result is displayed:

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A
The LED and buzzer are activated as follows:

OK led STanalyser without RBU: Click-point not exceeding the maximum transducer
overload. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A: Click-point within the torque
limits. Torque status is marked as OK.

NOK led The following causes give a Not OK result:


- Torque over the transducer overload.
- Click point out from the torque limits (not for STanalyser without RBU), or
click-point not detected.
Torque status is marked as Not OK.
NOTE: The torque status is marked as Not OK even if torque goes over the
transducer overload after that the click-point was detected within the limits:

Torque over
maximum overload.
Click-point.

n x OK led Batch completed with OK result (torque within the limits and Cm - Cmk reaching
the minimum values specified in the Pset).
This is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Buzzer High tone when click-point detected; lower tone if the test ends without click-
point detection.

160 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.1.1 Test setup for click-wrench test

 For STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A, all of the parameters described in this chapter are
stored inside the Pset. See the Pset chapter for details of the Pset programming.
 For STanalyser without RBU, these parameters are entered directly on the STanalyser menu, by
selecting Measurement Setup → Click Wrench Setup menu:

The following screen is displayed:

Scroll the parameters by using the UP/DOWN buttons, and click on OK to edit.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 161 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.1.1.1 Measure delay time


This timeout is used to filter the possible spikes or noise at low torque values. When the torque reaches the
Cycle Start value, the timer starts. During this time the torque trace is not analyzed and the click point is
not searched.
Torque

Ignored

Cycle start Time

Measure delay time

The timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0 ms (which means that the function is not
used).

9.1.1.2 Reset time


This timeout is use to filter the possible spikes/bounces after the click-point. When the torque goes below
the cycle complete value, the timer starts. During this time the torque trace is not analyzed (any click-point
possibly occurring during the reset time is not considered).

162 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

Torque

Ignored

Cycle complete Time

Reset time
The timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0 s, which means that the function is not
used. This timeout can be used in those cases where the click-wrench produces such spikes-bounces after
the click-point.

9.1.1.3 End cycle time

This timeout defines the end of the test. When the torque goes and remains below the Cycle Complete for
the given timeout, the test ends.
Torque

The test ends when torque


remains under the cycle
complete load for the timeout
(torque during the reset time
is ignored).

Cycle complete Time

Reset time

End cycle time

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 163 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

The Cycle Complete must be equal or less than the Cycle Start.
Timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0.4 s. The value of the End cycle time must be
equal or greater than the Reset time value.

9.1.1.4 Slip Torque

This parameter specifies the requested drop in torque after the click-point. If the torque drops more than
this value, the peak value is considered as the click-point; if not, the peak value is ignored.

Slip torque Torque drops more than the slip


torque → the peak is considered
as the click-point result.

Slip torque

Torque drops less than the


slip torque → the peak is
ignored.

If the parameter is set to Automatic, the STanalyser sets automatically a value which is based on the
transducer characteristics. However, is it possible to specify a value manually; this can be used, for
instance, if with the automatic value the click-point is not detected; in this case a few tests should be
performed and, after looking at the traces, selecting the proper value in order to detect the click-point.
Suggestions: Setting this value too low increases the risk to detecting a false click-point, while setting this
value too high increases the risk to not detecting the real click-point. The best trade-off can be figured out
only looking the characteristics of the specific click-wrench under test.

NOTE: During Cm-Cmk test, the test with result “not detected” are not considered for Cm-Cmk
calculation; when retrieving the result with ToolsTalk BLM all the results are shown. When
creating a report, do not select the “not detected” to match the statistics shown by the device.
To exclude the “not detected” results, enable the result confirmation option so that the operator
can discard the “not detected” results. See the STanalyser Tool Crib controller setup chapter for
more information.

164 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.1.1.5 Filter frequency (Fcut)

The filter frequency can be set from 100 to 1000 Hz. This is applied to the samples measured by the
torque transducer to filter the noise. The default value 1000 Hz, which is a convenient value for most of
the click-wrenches; a high value is used for wrenches having a click-point very “fast”, while a low value
helps in cases when the noise in the measurement is to strong and interferes with the click-point detection.

9.1.1.6 Direction (CW/CCW)

Select one of the following options:


 CW : The test must be executed in the clockwise direction.
 CCW : The test must be executed in the counter clockwise direction.
 CW/CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When the torque goes over the
minimum load, the test is started considering positive the torque in the direction of the torque
applied. Therefore, if executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some tests
clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results produce a positive torque in the
results.

9.1.1.7 Unit
Select the desired measurement unit.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 165 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.2 Testing Power Tools


By “power tools” we mean all those tools providing real torque to the joint, like battery tools, pneumatic
tools (not impulse) and electronic controlled tools.

For power tool test, the torque result shown by the STanalyser is the peak value measured during the test.

Torque

Time

In case of multiple peaks, the result is the one with higher value. To be detected as a peak, the peak must
satisfy the settings specified. See the next paragraphs of this chapter for details.
The Tool Crib T/A version monitors also the angle; therefore, it is possible to define a torque/angle
window in which the result is OK. See the Pset chapter for details.

166 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

A power tool is typically tested on a SRTT-B or SRTT-L with a mechanical joint simulator:

Mechanical joint
simulator
Mechanical joint
simulator

SRTT-B

SRTT-L

An IRTT-B or QRTT-B can be used on a mechanical joint simulator, and it provides also angle
measurement.
IRTT-B or QRTT-B are especially useful on production line as you can easily insert them between real
joint and tool under test:

IRTT-B

Real joint (a mechanical


joint simulator can be used
as well).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 167 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

During the test, the torque result (and the angle for the Tool Crib T/A) are displayed:

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A

The LED and buzzer are activated as follows:

OK led STanalyser without RBU: Torque peak detected. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T: Torque peak detected within the limits. Torque status
is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T/A: Torque peak detected. Torque result within the
torque limits. Torque status is marked as OK. If the Check Type in the Pset
parameters is set to Angle, the torque result is ignored, and the angle (measured at
the torque peak) must be within the angle limits. If the Check Type is set to
Torque and Angle, both of the results must be within the limits.

NOK led The following causes give a Not OK result:


- Peak not detected
- Peak detected but torque and/or angle, depending from what has been selected
as Check Type in the Pset parameters, out from the limits. This is not applicable to
STanalyser without RBU.
- Torque over the maximum torque transducer overload.
Torque (and/or angle) status is marked as Not OK.

N x OK led Batch completed with OK result (values within the limits and Cm - Cmk reaching
the minimum values specified in the Pset).
This is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Buzzer High tone if the result is OK; lower tone otherwise.

168 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.2.1 Test setup for power tool test

 For STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A, all of the parameters described in this chapter are
stored inside the Pset. See the Pset chapter for details of the Pset programming.
 For STanalyser without RBU, these parameters are entered directly on the STanalyser menu, by
selecting Measurement Setup → Power Tool Setup menu:

The following screen is displayed:

Scroll the parameters by using the UP/DOWN buttons, and click on OK to edit.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 169 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.2.1.1 Measure delay time


This timeout is used to filter the possible spikes or noise at the beginning of the test. When the torque
reaches the Cycle Start value, the timer starts. During this time the torque trace is not considered.
Torque

Ignored

Cycle start
Time

Measure delay time

The timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0 s (which means that the function is not
used).

9.2.1.2 Reset time


This timeout is use to filter the possible spikes/bounces after the tool clutch release the torque. When the
torque goes below the cycle complete value, the timer starts. During this time the torque trace is not
considered.
Torque

Ignored

Cycle complete
Time

Reset time

170 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

The timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0 ms, which means that the function is not
used. This timeout can be used in those cases where the power tool produces such spikes-bounces at the
end of the test.

9.2.1.3 End cycle time

This timeout defines the end of the test. When the torque goes and remains below the Cycle Complete for
the given timeout, the test ends.
Torque

The test ends when torque


remains under the cycle
complete load for the timeout
(torque during the reset time
is ignored).

Cycle complete
Time
Reset time

End cycle time

The Cycle Complete must be equal or less than the Cycle Start.
Timeout can be set from 0 s up to 5 s. The default value is 0.4 s. The value of the End cycle time must be
equal or greater than the Reset time value.

9.2.1.4 Filter frequency (Fcut)

The filter frequency can be set from 100 to 2000 Hz. This is applied to the samples measured by the
torque transducer to filter the noise. The default value is 500 Hz. It may be necessary to increase the value
for certain tools where the default value does not suit the specific tool characteristics.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 171 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.2.1.5 Direction (CW/CCW)


Select one of the following options:
 CW : The test must be executed in the clockwise direction.
 CCW : The test must be executed in the counter clockwise direction.
 CW/CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When the torque goes over the
minimum load, the test is started considering positive the torque in the direction of the torque
applied. Therefore, if executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some tests
clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results produce a positive torque in the
results.

9.2.1.6 Unit
Select the desired measurement unit.

172 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.3 Peak Detection Test


The peak test provides the maximum torque measured during the test. The typical application of this
method is the test of slip-wrenches, described in the next paragraph.

9.3.1 Testing slip-wrenches


A slip-wrench is typically tested on a SRTT-B or SRTT-L:

SRTT-B

SRTT-L

The “slip-point” point is the peak value of the trace.


Torque
Slip-point

Time

The torque result is the peak value measured during the test.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 173 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

At the end of each test the torque result is displayed:

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A

The LED and buzzer are activated as follows:

OK led STanalyser without RBU: Peak value not exceeding the maximum transducer
overload. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T: Peak within the limits. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T/A: Torque peak within the limit. Torque status is
marked as OK. The Check Type in the Pset parameters should be set to Torque for
testing slip-wrenches.

NOK led The following causes give a Not OK result:


- Torque over the transducer overload
- Torque out from the limits (not for STanalyser without RBU).
Torque status is marked as Not OK.

n x OK led Batch completed with OK result (torque within the limits and Cm - Cmk reaching
the minimum values specified in the Pset).
This is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Buzzer High tone when peak value is within the limit; lower tone the torque goes over the
transducer overload.

174 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.3.2 Testing other tools

The Peak detection test can be also used to test any tool in which the goal is to measure the peak point.
For instance, for the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A providing also angle reading, the Peak detection test can
be used to test electronic wrenches with angle measurement.
The torque result is the peak value measured during the test.
During the test, the torque result (and the angle for the Tool Crib T/A) is displayed:

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A
The LED and buzzer are activated as follows:

OK led STanalyser without RBU: Torque peak detected. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T: Torque peak detected within the limits. Torque status
is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T/A: Torque peak detected. Torque result within the
torque limits. Torque status is marked as OK. If the Check Type in the Pset
parameters is set to Angle, the torque result is ignored, and the angle (measured at
the torque peak) must be within the angle limits. If the Check Type is set to
Torque and Angle, both of the results must be within the limits.

NOK led The following causes give a Not OK result:


- Peak not detected
- Peak detected but torque and/or angle, depending from what has been selected
as Check Type in the Pset parameters, out from the limits (not for STanalyser
without RBU).
- Torque over the maximum torque transducer overload.
Torque (and/or angle) status is marked as Not OK.

n x OK led Batch completed with OK result (torque within the limits and Cm - Cmk reaching
the minimum values specified in the Pset).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 175 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

This is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Buzzer High tone when peak value is within the limit; lower tone the torque goes over the
transducer overload.

9.3.3 Test setup for peak detection test

 For STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A, all of the parameters described in this chapter are
stored inside the Pset. See the Pset chapter for details of the Pset programming.
 For STanalyser without RBU, these parameters are entered directly on the STanalyser menu, by
selecting Measurement Setup → Peak Setup menu:

The following screen is displayed:

Scroll the parameters by using the UP/DOWN buttons, and click on OK to edit.

176 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.3.3.1 Timeout

The timeout defines the end of the test. When the torque goes and remains below the transducer minimum
load (which is normally the 5% of the transducer full scale) for the given timeout, the test ends.
Torque
Transducer full scale

The test ends when torque


remains under the
transducer minimum load
for the timeout.
Transducer min. load

If torque goes over transducer Timeout


Timeout Time
minimum load before the
timeout, the test continues.

Timeout can be set from 100 ms up to 2000 ms. The default value is 100 ms.

NOTE: For slip-wrenches, the operator should operate the wrench until the slip point is
reached, and stop rotating the wrench after. With the timeout default value, if the operator
continues to rotate the wrench producing more slips, each of them produces a test results:

With default short timeout, Setting a longer timeout, only


both of the two points will the higher of the two points
produce a result. will produce a result.
9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 177 (383)
Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.3.3.2 Filter frequency (Fcut)

The filter frequency can be set from 100 to 2000 Hz. This is applied to the samples measured by the
torque transducer to filter the noise. The default value is 100 Hz.

9.3.3.3 Direction (CW/CCW)

Select one of the following options:


 CW : The test must be executed in the clockwise direction.
 CCW : The test must be executed in the counter clockwise direction.
 CW/CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When the torque goes over the
minimum load, the test is started considering positive the torque in the direction of the torque
applied. Therefore, if executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some tests
clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results produce a positive torque in the
results.

9.3.3.4 Unit

Select the desired measurement unit.

178 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.4 Testing Pulse Tools


NOTE: Starting from STanalyser serial number 5560.0600, and from firmware version 5.0,
there are two different strategies for testing pulse tools: Pulse Tools and ACTA Pulse Tools.
The first strategy is the standard strategy developed for the STanalyser, while the second
strategy has been created to maintain a compatibility with the algorithm provided by the ACTA
4000.
The main differences are:
- Torque correction coefficient: Available only in the Pulse Tools
- Pulse tool frequency calculation: Different algorithm used (see below)

Pulse tools provide a series of pulses to tighten the joint.


A pulse tool without shut-off valve can be tested directly on a SRTT-B or SRTT-L:

SRTT-B

SRTT-L

Torque No shut-off tool

Time
9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 179 (383)
Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

Tools with shut-off must be tested with a mechanical joint simulator on the transducer.

Mechanical
joint
simulator
Mechanical
joint
SRTT-B simulator

SRTT-L

Torque Shut-off tool

Time

The test can be also performed on the real joint by adding an IRTT-B or QRTT-B between the tool and the
joint.
In this case, tools with or without shut-off valve is tested in the same configuration:

180 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

IRTT-B Pulse tool (with or without shut-off ).

Real joint

WARNING: Impact tools cannot be tested on IRTT-B and SRTT-B and SRTT-L and QRTT-B.

During the test, the torque result is displayed. The Tool Crib T/A version shows the frequency of the
pulses (for the Tool Crib T the frequency can be choose in one of the four statistics displayed, and the
STanalyser without RBU shows an additional Frequency field):

STanalyser without RBU and Tool Crib T STanalyser AA and Tool Crib T/A
It is possible to show the total number of pulses instead of the frequency; see the STanalyser Tool Crib
controller setup chapter for details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 181 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

The Pulse Tool and ACTA Pulse Tool filter frequency can be configured from 100 Hz to 2 kHz.
To calculate the tool frequency, the Pulse Tool strategy uses a configurable threshold to identify a peak,
while the ACTA Pulse Tool strategy uses a set of timers and recalculates the Cycle Start dynamically each
time a peak is measured (the Cycle Start is set to the last peak value divided by 1.5).
The LED and buzzer are activated as follows:

OK led STanalyser without RBU: Peak value not exceeding the maximum transducer
overload. Torque status is marked as OK.
STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A: Peak within the limits. Torque
status is marked as OK.

NOK led The following causes give a Not OK result:


- Torque over the transducer overload
- Torque out from the limits (not for STanalyser without RBU).
Torque status is marked as Not OK.

N x OK led Batch completed with OK result (torque within the limits and Cm - Cmk reaching
the minimum values specified in the Pset).
This is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Buzzer High tone when the peak value is within the limit; lower tone if the torque goes
over the maximum torque transducer overload.

9.4.1 Test setup for Pulse Tool test

 For STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A, all of the parameters described in this chapter are
stored inside the Pset. See the Pset chapter for details of the Pset programming.
 For STanalyser without RBU, these parameters are entered directly on the STanalyser menu, by
selecting Measurement Setup → Pulse Tool Setup:

182 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

The following screen is displayed:

Scroll the parameters by using the UP/DOWN buttons, and click on OK to edit.

9.4.1.1 End cycle time

When the torque goes and remains below the transducer minimum load (which is normally the 5% of the
transducer full scale) for the given time, the test ends.
Torque
Transducer full scale
The test ends when torque
remains under the
transducer minimum load
for the timeout.

Transducer min. load

Time

End cycle time End cycle time

Timeout can be set from 100 ms up to 2000 ms. The default value is 100 ms.

9.4.1.2 Torque coefficient

Pulse tools do not provide a continuous torque output, but they generate single high energy pulse of very
short duration (≈ 1ms). This series of pulses results in the tightening of a joint. Due to the physics of the

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 183 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

tool the final torque reached cannot be measured directly as for real torque tools. The reason for this is that
pulse tools provide a very high torque for such a short time that only a part of these peaks translate into the
tightening of the joint (generating more clamping force). This depends on many factors such as the bolt
mass, friction, the stiffness of the joint, etc...
The torque coefficient can be used to align the torque measured by the transducer with the real torque
produced on the joint.
The torque produced on the real joint will be always smaller (ideally equal) than the peak torque measured
on the transducer. Therefore, this coefficient can be set to values between 0.50 and 1.00.

Torque Peak value measured on


the torque transducer.

Actual torque measured


on the joint.

Time

The only way to evaluate the actual torque is to make a residual torque check on the real joint (for
instance, by using a STwrench). The relation between the peak torque measured on the transducer and the
actual torque on the joint is affected by all the components: The pulse tool, the adapters, the transducer,
and the joint itself. If any of these components is changed, the relation peak torque – actual torque should
be recalculated.
The following process should be used to adjust the pulse tool in order to provide the desired torque on the
real joint and to calculate the proper coefficient K:

184 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

Set a low torque

Check the
residual torque OK

Too low

Slightly increase
torque

For instance, assume a target torque for the joint of 100 Nm, and after the tool regulation the residual
torque check gives 100 Nm; if the torque measured on the transducer is 120 Nm, in that case the
coefficient is 100/120 = 0.83.
For STanalyser without RBU, the torque coefficient (K) is entered directly on the STanalyser menu,
either manually or by an automatic procedure, as described here:
To set manually, select K tuning → Manual mode, and adjust the value by using the UP/DOWN arrows
on the keyboard, and press OK to confirm:

To use the automatic procedure, select K tuning → Automatic mode, and follow this procedure (note that
this procedure selects the measurement unit Nm, even if another measurement unit is currently selected):

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 185 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

The STanalyser asks to enter


Execute test with pulse tool the residual torque (the default
on the STanalyser value is set to 50% of the value Execute the tightening on
measured by the analyser). real joint and measure then
the residual torque.

By using the UP/DOWN arrows on the STanalyser


keyboard, enter the residual torque value measured and
press OK. The proper K value will be automatically
stored.

9.4.1.3 Filter frequency (Fcut)

The filter frequency can be set from 100 to 2000 Hz. This is applied to the samples measured by the
torque transducer to filter the noise. The default value is 850 Hz.

9.4.1.4 Direction (CW/CCW)

Select one of the following options:


 CW : The test must be executed in the clockwise direction.

186 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

 CCW : The test must be executed in the counter clockwise direction.


 CW/CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When the torque goes over the
minimum load, the test is started considering positive the torque in the direction of the torque
applied. Therefore, if executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some tests
clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results produce a positive torque in the
results.

9.4.1.5 Unit

Select the desired measurement unit.

9.4.1.6 Threshold (THR 2)

The threshold is used to filter the trace for proper peak detection for the frequency calculation. After each
peak is detected, all the values under the threshold are discarded. This filters all the bounces always
present in a pulse tightening.
The default value is 80%.

Torque
Peak Peak

Peak

Time

Bounces Bounces

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 187 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

9.4.2 Test setup for ACTA Pulse Tool test

The ACTA Pulse Tool strategy features a different setup compared to standard Pulse Tool strategy.
 For STanalyser Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A, all of the parameters described in this chapter are
stored inside the Pset. See the Pset chapter for details of the Pset programming.
 For STanalyser without RBU, these parameters are entered directly on the STanalyser menu, by
selecting Measurement Setup → ACTA Pulse Tool Setup:

The following screen is displayed:

Scroll the parameters by using the UP/DOWN buttons, and click on OK to edit.

9.4.2.1 Measure delay time

When the torque goes over the cycle start value, the torque is ignored during this Measure delay time. This
can be helpful to not considering noise and “false pulses” at the low torque values.

188 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

Torque
Transducer full scale

Cycle start
Time

Measure delay time


The default value is 0 ms (no delay applied).

9.4.2.2 Reset time


After each peak, the reset time defines a time during which the STanalyser does not consider the torque
trace.
This can be helpful in order to avoid considering as two real peaks the real peak and the bounces possibly
produced by the peak itself.
Torque Peak

Bounce

Time

Reset Reset Reset


time time time

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 189 (383)


Tool Testing STanalyser User Guide

The value of this parameter depends on the frequency of the pulse tool and from the bounces possibly
present in the trace.
The default value is 0 ms (no reset time applied).

9.4.2.3 End cycle time

When the torque goes and remains below the Cycle complete for the end cycle time, the test ends.
Torque
Transducer full scale
The test ends when torque
remains under the Cycle
complete for the End cycle
time.

Cycle complete

Time

End cycle time End cycle time

Timeout can be set from 100 ms up to 2000 ms. The default value is 100 ms.

9.4.2.4 Filter frequency (Fcut)

The filter frequency can be set from 100 Hz to 2000 Hz. This is applied to the samples measured by the
torque transducer to filter the torque trace. Due to the physics involved into pulse tools measurement,
changing this value alters the reading of the peak value. The default value is 850 Hz.

190 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Tool testing

9.4.2.5 Direction (CW/CCW)

Select one of the following options:


 CW : The test must be executed in the clockwise direction.
 CCW : The test must be executed in the counter clockwise direction.
 CW/CCW: The test can be executed in both the directions. When the torque goes over the
minimum load, the test is started considering positive the torque in the direction of the torque
applied. Therefore, if executing different tests of the same batch in opposite direction (some tests
clockwise and some tests counter clockwise) all of the test results produce a positive torque in the
results.

9.4.2.6 Unit
Select the desired measurement unit.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 191 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10 STanalyser Production and Residual

The STanalyser Production is an instrument developed to execute tightening operations, while the
STanalyser Residual is developed to execute test to evaluate the residual torque on a joint and to make
joint analysis. Both the instruments measure torque and angle.
The barcode reader module (optional) can be used to select the tightening program and associate the data
scanned to the results, while the optional IRC-W module can be used to connect the STanalyser to
ToolsNet.

NOTE: The STanalyser AA version also supports all of the features available in the STanalyser
residual. See also the STanalyser AA (Advanced Analysis) chapter for details of the AA version.

LEDs

MRTT-C

STanalyser
with RBU Production or
Residual Barcode reader

IRC-W
connection

NOTE: In the STanalyser Production and Residual versions, when using a MRTT-C the LEDs
on the STanalyser are disabled, and the LEDs on the MRTT-C are used.

192 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The MRTT-C should be used with the STanalyser Production and Residual; however, it is also possible to
use an IRTT-B, a QRTT-B, a BLM 5015 or a MRTT-B, which supports only test/tightening strategies in
“only torque”.
A wide set of tightening strategies is provided with this instrument. See the chapter Tightening Strategies
for STanalyser Production and Quality Control Strategies for STanalyser Residual for
details.
For the STanalyser Production the connection to Torque Supervisor is not available.
The tests must be programmed by the ToolsTalk BLM, which can retrieve the test results.

10.1 Use of the STanalyser Production and Residual


The main menu is the following:

Free Mode This menu conducts a free test, without the need of programming the
STanalyser with ToolsTalk BLM. See the Getting Started with STanalyser
chapter for details.

Prog. Mode This menu accesses the tightening programs (Pset, Job and Multistage),
defined and sent to the STanalyser by ToolsTalk BLM.

NOTE: The Prog. Mode is disabled when the program source is set to
Barcode. See the Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection
chapter for details.

Settings Enter this menu to set the language, date and time and transducer overload.

Results This menu shows all of the results present in the STanalyser memory. See
the Results Viewer chapter for details.
Transducers This menu is used to select the transducer in use and shows a transducer
information window.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 193 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

To execute a tightening with the STanalyser Production and Residual, the following sequence is required:

1. Create a tightening program (Pset, Multistage or Job).


2. Connect a MRTT-C (or an IRTT-B or QRTT-B) to the STanalyser
3. Select the tightening program and execute the tightening

10.2 Pset for Production and Residual


The set of parameters that controls the tightening process is contained within a so-called Pset.
This section describes how to setup the Pset parameters necessary to perform a tightening.

The STanalyser can store up to 200 Pset/Multistage in its memory.

Click on the Pset icon (or right-click on Pset in the STanalyser map) to create the various Psets for the
tools to be tested:
Click to create
a Pset

Right-click to create
a Pset

List of Psets
created

194 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

When creating a new Pset, the following window is shown:

Enter the Pset name and click on Ok to continue:

Select the tightening strategy

First, select the tightening strategy. See the Tightening Strategies for STanalyser Production and Quality
Control Strategies for STanalyser Residual for details.
Then, continue in programming the Pset:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 195 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Torque / angle
parameters

10.2.1 Torque parameters

Cycle Start Torque value from which to start the tightening operation.
This must be higher than the MRTT-C (or IRTT-B or QRTT-B) Min. Load value;
if not, when the Pset is started the following error message is shown :

Final Torque min Torque limit (low).

Final Target Torque target.

Final Torque max Torque limit (high).

196 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Measure Torque at Select between Torque Peak and Angle Peak:

NOTE: The torque result of a tightening changes according to the tightening


strategy, and may varies if the torque result falls into the torque range or not. See
the specific tightening strategies at the end of this chapter for details.

Change screw at If the Torque reaches this limit, the message “change screw” is shown on the
STanalyser display. This must be higher than the Final Torque max value.

Unit of measure Select the desired unit.

10.2.2 Angle parameters

Start final angle Torque threshold from which to start the angle count.

Min angle Angle limit (low).

Max angle Angle limit (high).

Alarm on rehit Enable/disable the function to check if the screw is already tightened (defined
trough the Check already tightened angle parameter).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 197 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Check already
tightened angle

Max. Torque

Target Torque
Min. Torque

Cycle start

Min. Angle Max. Angle

Check already tightened angle

If the torque reaches the Min. Torque value within this


angle, an error message “screw already tightened” is
shown on the STanalyser display.

This field is active only if the Alarm on rehit is enabled.

198 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Timeout

Batch options

Pset options

10.2.3 Timeout

Ratchet time Applied when the torque goes below the cycle start but has not yet reached the 3rd
Percentage value (see LED settings). This allows the operator to release the torque for a
while and recharge during the tightening operation; the default value is 5 seconds.
Minimum value: 0.1 Sec
Maximum value: 30 Sec

End cycle Applied when torque goes below the cycle start and reaches the 3rd Percentage value
time (see LED settings); the default value is 0.1 second.
Minimum value: 0.1 Sec
Maximum value: 5 Sec

The STanalyser ends the tightening operation if the torque drops beneath the Cycle Start value for a longer
time than the timer.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 199 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

3rd Percentage

Ratchet time End cycle time

Cycle start

Time

10.2.4 Batch parameters

Batch count Set to Pset if you want to execute the Pset more than once.

Batch size If Batch count is enabled, specify how many times the Pset must be executed.
Maximum value: 99

NOTE: If the Batch count is disabled, the Batch status in the tightening results
is always OK.
By enabling the Batch count and setting the Batch size to 1, it is possible to
have the Batch result OK only if the Pset gives result OK.
If the Batch size is greater than 1, the Batch result is OK only if all of the Pset
give result OK.

Lock at batch done If enabled, at the end of the batch the STanalyser freezes the display; to exit the
menu, the operator must press the OK button.

If not enabled, when the batch is completed a new batch is started again.

Max coherent NOK Maximum number of Pset with Not OK result.


results Maximum value: 9

For instance, if this parameter is set to 2, at the second Not OK result during the
batch execution, the batch execution stops and the following message is shown
on the STanalyser display:

200 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

This parameter is active only if the batch increment condition is set to OK in


the controller configuration.

10.2.5 Options

Tool recognition If enabled, the Pset execution checks that the specified tool is inserted in the
required MRTT-C head (the STanalyser does not select the Pset automatically
inserting the tool in the MRTT-C head).

To use the tool recognition function to automatically select Pset/Multistage,


see the Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection chapter. When
this function is used, this flag does not have any effect.

This parameter is ignored when an IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used.

Tool number Specify the end fitting tool number required for the Pset.

If the tool recognition function is used to select the Pset/Multistage


automatically, this is the end fitting tool number which activates the Pset.

Maximum value: 100

This parameter is ignored when an IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used.

Tightening direction Select Clockwise (CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW).

Torque correction These parameters are used to correct the torque and angle reading when you
coefficient and Angle are using an extension to the MRTT-C. See Appendix A – Calculating
correction coefficient Correction Coefficients for MRTT-C Extensions for details.

Normally these coefficients are stored into the TAG of the end fitting tool
(see TAG Writer); however, it is possible to specify them here, in case the

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 201 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

tool recognition function is not enabled in the STanalyser settings (a typical


example is when the extension in use does not have the RFID TAG.)

Leave the Torque Correction Coefficient set to 1, and the Angle Correction
Coefficient set to 0, if these parameters are set into the RFID TAG of the end
fitting tool; if different values are specified, the STanalyser corrects torque
and angle reading considering all of them (the two torque correction
coefficients are multiplied, while the two angle correction coefficients are
summed).

Barcode required If enabled, before starting the Pset execution the STanalyser needs to scan the
specified barcode. See the chapter Identifier.

To use the barcode reading to select Pset automatically, see the Setting the
source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection chapter. When that function is used,
this flag does not have any effect.

Auto delete This parameter is not used in this software version.

Once the Psets are created, it is possible to group them into “musltistages” and “jobs”.

10.3 Creating a Multistage

NOTE: Multistage is available only on the STanalyser Production version.

The Multistage feature offers a dynamic link to more than one Pset in several steps in order to
perform a sequence of operations.

The STanalyser can store up to 200 Pset/Multistage in its memory


A typical application scenario is joint conditioning, in which the fastener is run to a torque level of 10 Nm
then backed off by 180 degrees and then fastened to a final torque level of 14 Nm. This operation would
be regarded as a three steps Multistage.
To create a Multistage, click on the Multistage icon or right-click on Multistage in the STanalyser Map:

202 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Multistage
icon

Right-click to create
a Multistage

The following window is shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 203 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Multistage
name

Multistage
batch options

Multistage
options

Pset list

Double-click to
add a row

First set the Multistage name in the Multistage name field.


The sequence in which Psets are executed is defined in the Pset list (as shown in the figure above). Double
click on the Pset column (or click on Add row) to add a Pset to the multistage.
The maximum number of Pset composing a multistage is 100.
Next, select the Pset in the Multistage from you wish to get the result, the Pset parameters, and the trace
(they are normally taken from the same Pset, but may be chosen differently if needed).

204 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Batch count Set to Pset if you want to execute the multistage sequence more than once.

Batch size If Batch count is enabled, specify how many times the multistage sequence is
executed.
Maximum value: 99

NOTE: If the Batch count is disabled, the Batch status in the tightening results
is always OK.
By enabling the Batch count and setting the Batch size to 1, it is possible to
have the Batch result OK only if the Multistage gives result OK.
If the Batch size is greater than 1, the Batch result is OK only if all of the
Multistage give result OK.

NOTE: The Batch count defined for the single Pset is not considered in the Multistage
execution. Each Pset is executed once.
Lock at batch done If enabled, at the end of the batch the STanalyser freezes the display; to exit the
menu, the operator must press the OK button.

If not enabled, when the batch is completed a new batch is started again.

Max coherent NOK Maximum number of Pset with Not OK result in the Multistage execution
results Maximum value: 9

Tool recognition If enabled, the STanalyser does not select the Multistage automatically inserting
required the tool in the MRTT-C head, but the Multistage execution checks that the
specified tool is inserted.

To use the tool recognition function to automatically select Pset/Multistage, see


the Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection chapter. When this
function is used, this flag does not have any effect.

This parameter is ignored when an IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used.

Tool number Specify the end fitting tool number required for the Multistage.

If the tool recognition function is used to select the Pset/Multistage


automatically, this is the end fitting tool number which activates the Multistage.

Maximum value: 100

This parameter is ignored when an IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 205 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Barcode required If enabled, before starting the Pset execution the STanalyser needs to scan the
specified barcode. See the Identifier chapter for details.

To use the tool recognition function to automatically select Pset/Multistage, see


the Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection chapter. When this
function is used, this flag does not have any effect.

NOTE: The last three parameters are applied to all the Pset belonging to the multistage, and
override the settings of the various Psets.

10.4 Creating a Job

The Job function is advantageous when an object has bolts or screws requiring different torque
and angle values for tightening. A Job is useful when an object needs different Psets and
Multistages. Instead of manually selecting each Pset or Multistage, the Job function keeps Psets
and Multistages in a predefined order.

The STanalyser can store up to 100 Jobs in its memory.

To create a Job, click on the Job icon or right-click on Job in the STanalyser Map:

206 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Job icon

Right-click to create
a Job

The following window is shown:

Job name and


type

Job options

Pset/Multistage list,
batch size and Max
coherent NOK result.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 207 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

The Job sequence is defined in the Pset/Multistage list. Double click on the Pset/Ms column to add a Pset
or Multistage to the job.
The maximum number of Pset/Multistages composing a multistage is 30.
For each Pset/Multistage composing the job the following parameters must be specified:

Batch size How many times the Pset (Multistage) must be executed.
Maximum value: 99

Max. coherent NOK results Maximum number of Not OK results.


Maximum value: 9

The job control and options parameters are:

Job name Job name.

Job type Forced: Job executed in the given sequence.


Free: Manually select the order. If the Sub Source Job is set for Tag or
Barcode (see the chapter Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job
selection), the selection of the Pset/Multistage composing the job is done
automatically with the Tag recognition function or with the barcode reader.
Repeat job If enabled, at the end of the Job (Job summary is shown on display), by
pressing the OK button the STanalyser, or by applying torque over the cycle
start value, the job starts again.
By pressing the CL button the STanalyser exits the Job.
If disabled, after the Job Summary the STanalyser exits the Job either by
pressing the OK or CL button.

Reset strategy In the event of Not OK, select whether to repeat just the Pset or the entire
batch. This flag does not have effect if the Batch increment condition in the
STanalyser settings is set to OK + Not OK

Result of non If enabled, a Not Ok result is generated for the tightening operations skipped.
tightenings

Barcode required If enabled, before starting the Job execution the STanalyser needs to scan the
specified barcode. See the chapter Identifier.

Job identifier result Job VIN number: All tightening results/events during a Job are saved in
part 1 database (result part 1) together with the Job identifier string (even if other
identifier string is received during the running Job).
Other: Always the latest received VIN number (identifier string) are stored
together with tightening result in database.

208 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

This parameter is used when the Job source is barcode.


See the chapter Identifier for details about identifier concepts.

10.5 Executing Psets, Multistages and Jobs

Once the Pset/Multistage/Job is created on the STanalyser map area in ToolsTalk BLM, it is automatically
sent to the STanalyser.
To execute the Pset/Multistage/Job, select Prog. Mode from the main menu of the STanalyser:

If the Pset/Multistage/Job are grouped (see the Enabling Pset/Multistage/Job grouping in Prog. Mode
chapter for details), there one more intermediate screen to select the tightening program:

Select the tightening program from the list and click on the OK button on the keyboard to start the
execution.
NOTE: If the source program is set to Bar code or TAG, instead of manually selecting the
tightening program with the STanalyser keyboard, the selection is performed automatically by
reading the associated Bar Code or inserting the end fitting tool in the MRTT-C. In that case the
Prog. Mode menu is hidden:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 209 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

If the source program is the keyboard, and a barcode reading is required for the tightening
program, the following message is shown to indicate that the bar code is required:

If the source program is the keyboard, and a specific end fitting tool number is required
for the Pset, the following message is shown if the specified tool is not inserted in the
MRTT-C head:

During the execution, the STanalyser display shows the torque and angle values, and the tightening
direction:

Example for Job execution

Tightening program name.

Torque and Angle values.


The arrow under the measurement unit label indicates if result is taken on
the torque peak or angle peak (when applicable).

210 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The arrow indicates the tightening direction (Clockwise or


Counterclockwise).
During the tightening operation, it starts blinking when torque goes over
the Cycle Start value, and return to steady at the end of the operation.
Blinking indicates that the tightening operation has started.
The batch count number is displayed on the right side of the bottom part
of the screen (for a Pset execution, not belonging to a Multistage or Job,
the batch count is not shown if the batch size is 1).
The first tightening of the batch is marked as 0.

The M: 0/3 indicates that the first Pset of the multistage is in execution.

The J: 0/2 indicates that the first tightening program (Pset or Multistage)
of the job is in execution.

If the tightening is Not OK, the batch number is not increased and it must
be repeated until the result is OK; if a Max coherent NOK result is defined
in the tightening program definition, when the number of Not OK results
reaches the maximum value the following message is displayed:

For each tightening operation, the LEDs indicator, buzzer and vibration devices are activated according to
the selected tightening strategy. Refer to the Pset for Production and Residual chapter for details.

Tightening results data are stored automatically in the STanalyser memory; see the Results Viewer
chapter for information on how to retrieve results with ToolsTalk BLM.

When executing a Job, if the Job is defined as Forced, the sequence of the Pset/Multistage is performed
automatically; if the Job is defined as Free, sub-selection of the Pset/Multistages composing the job can
be done using the STanalyser keyboard, by the Tag recognition function or by the Barcode reading.
See the chapter Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection.
At the end of the Job execution the following summary is displayed:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 211 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

NOTE: Every Pset/Multistage counts as 1 for the number of Results OK and Results NOK,
regardless of the fact that a Multistage may content many Psets, and regardless of the batch
number of each Pset/Multistage in the Job.

10.6 Tightening Strategies for STanalyser Production

Production strategies can be divided into four main categories:

1. Tightening within torque limits

This is the easiest tightening method, simply applying the torque


within the limits.

2. Tightening within torque and angle limits (tightening to a window)

This is a more accurate way to tighten, as we use additional


information (angle) during the tightening process.
Using this method you can detect possible problems on the joint:

212 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Torque is correct, but angle is too short:


• Misalignment problem
• The hole is not completely threaded (or it is not deep enough)
• The bolt is stopped by oil in a dead hole
• There is dirt in the threads
• The threads are damaged
• The screw is already tightened

Angle is correct, but torque is too low:

• The thread may be stripped out


• The screw is too soft (tightened over yield)
• Unexpected low µ (friction coefficient)

3. Tightening with torque and additional angle rotation (torque + angle)

The bolt is first tightened to a certain torque and then it is further


tightened to a specific angle.

The goal is to stress the bolt over the yield point. Even with differences in the angle the torque (causing
clamping force) is quite consistent. Sometime the joint is specially designed and of course experiments
have been done (joint analysis) to be sure that strain is far away from the breaking point.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 213 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

4. Tightening to elastic limits (yield)

The bolt is tightened until its elastic limit is reached.

This method is used when each bolt must achieve the maximum clamping force. This method is normally
seldom used in the car industry (example: Connecting rods). It is more common in the aerospace industry.

These bolts are normally used in special applications and the shank of the bolt
is designed with a special thin section to be stretched (this bolt works as a
precise spring).

The next paragraphs explain in details how the STanalyser performs these tightening methods.

214 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.6.1 Torque

This strategy guides the operator in reaching the desired target torque, without any angle reading.

Simply define the Cycle start, Minimum Torque, Target Torque and Maximum Torque, and the Change
Screw Torque.

Torque

Max. Torque

Target Torque

Min. Torque

Cycle start

Time
The green area identifies the OK result area.
If the torque goes over the “change screw” value a message is shown on the STanalyser display advising
the operator to replace the screw.

The torque result is the maximum torque measured during the tightening.

The LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque result between Cycle Start and Min. Torque.

Green LED Torque result between Min. Torque and Max Torque.

Red LED Torque result over Max. Torque.

NOTE: The result LED indicating the result of the tightening is activated only when the tightening
operation is completed.

First line of yellow LEDs Torque over 1st percentage.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 215 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Second row of yellow LEDs Torque over 2sd percentage.

Third row of yellow LEDs Torque over 3rd percentage.

NOTE: The three rows of LEDs are activated anyway if the torque goes over the Max. Torque value
(normally set higher than the 3rd percentage value).

Torque

Max. Torque

3rd percentage

2nd percentage

1st percentage

Time

Buzzer The beep emitted by the buzzer starts when the torque goes over the
Cycle Start value; it increases its signal when the 1st percentage, the 2nd
percentage, the 3rd percentage, and the Max torque are reached.

At the end of the tightening operation two more beeps inform the
operator of the end of the operation, and if the final result is in the red
area, the buzzer signal remains steadily ON.

Vibration Activated together with the third row of LEDs, and remains active until
the torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

216 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.6.2 Torque (Control) / Angle (Monitor)


This strategy guides the operator in reaching the desired target torque and monitoring the angle.

The Start Final Angle parameter is the threshold from which to start angle measurement (normally set to
50% of the Target Torque).
Torque

Max. Torque

Target Torque

Min. Torque

Start Final Angle

Cycle start

Min. Angle Max. Angle Angle

The green area defines the OK result area.


If the torque goes over the “change screw” value a message is shown on the STanalyser display advising
the operator to replace the screw.
Torque/angle results:
- If the torque/angle does not exceed the torque/angle limits, the result is taken at the torque
peak or angle peak as specified in the Pset options.
- If the torque/angle goes over the limit, the result is taken as follow:

Torque peak Torque peak

Angle peak Angle peak

Torque peak selected in the Pset options Angle peak selected in the Pset options

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 217 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque result between Cycle Start and Min. Torque, or torque between Min.
Torque and Max. Torque but angle under the Min. Angle.

If Measure torque/Angle at is set to Angle peak, the Start Final Angle value is
used instead of the Cycle Start.

Green LED Torque and angle results within the minimum and maximum limits.

Red LED Torque result over the Max. Torque or angle over Max. Angle.

NOTE: The result LED indicating the result of the tightening is activated only when the tightening
operation is completed.

First row of yellow LEDs Torque over 1st percentage.

Second row of yellow LEDs Torque over 2sd percentage.

Third row of yellow LEDs Torque over 3rd percentage; it is also activated if torque or angle over the
maximum value.

Torque

Max. Torque

3rd percentage
2nd percentage

1st percentage

Cycle start

Max. Angle Angle

218 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Buzzer The beep emitted by the buzzer starts when the torque goes over the
Cycle Start value; it increases its signal when the 1st percentage, the 2nd
percentage, the 3rd percentage, and the Max torque are reached.

At the end of the tightening operation two more beeps inform the
operator of the end of the operation, and if the final result is in the red
area, the buzzer signal remains steadily ON.

Vibration Activated together with the third row of LEDs, and remains active until
the torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

10.6.3 Torque (Monitor) / Angle (Control)


This strategy guides to operator in reaching the desired target angle and monitoring torque.

Torque

Max. Torque

Min. Torque

Start Final Angle

Cycle start

Target Max. Angle Angle


Angle
This strategy is similar to Torque (Control) / Angle (Monitor); the Target Angle value is required instead
of the Target Torque, and the 3 rows of yellow LEDs come on when the 3 percentages of the Target Angle
are reached, instead of the Target Torque.
Torque/angle results:
- If the torque/angle does not exceed the torque/angle limits, the result is taken at the torque
peak or angle peak as specified in the Pset options.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 219 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

- If the torque/angle goes over the limit, the result is taken as follow:

Torque peak Torque peak

Angle peak Angle peak

Torque peak selected in the Pset options Angle peak selected in the Pset options

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Angle result between Cycle Start and Min. Angle, or torque between Min.
Torque and Max. Torque with angle under the Min. Angle.

If Measure torque/Angle at is set to Angle peak, the Start Final Angle


value is used instead of the Cycle Start.

Green LED Angle and torque results within the minimum and maximum limits.

Red LED Angle result over Max. Angle or torque result over Max. Torque.

NOTE: The result LED indicating the result of the tightening is activated only when the tightening
operation is completed.

First row of yellow LEDs Angle over 1st percentage.

Second row of yellow LEDs Angle over 2sd percentage.

Third row of yellow LEDs Angle over 3rd percentage; it is also activated if torque or angle over the
maximum value.

220 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Torque

Max. Torque

Cycle start
2nd percentage

Angle
1st percentage

3rd percentage

Max. Angle

Buzzer The beep emitted by the buzzer starts when the torque goes over the
Cycle Start value; it increases its signal when the 1st percentage, the 2nd
percentage, the 3rd percentage are reached.

At the end of the tightening operation two more beeps inform the
operator of the end of the operation, and if the final result is in the red
area, the buzzer signal remains steadily ON.

Vibration Activated together with the third row of LEDs, and remains active until
the torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 221 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.6.3.1 Torque + Angle Strategy

You can also achieve the Torque + Angle strategy using the Torque (Mon) / Angle (Contr) strategy:
Define the Start Final Angle value as the torque value from which you want to start performing the “+
Angle” of this strategy:
Torque

Max. Torque

Min. Torque

Start Final Angle

Angle
Target Angle

222 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.6.4 Torque (Control) / Angle (Control) OR

This strategy guides the operator in reaching the desired target torque and angle.
The Start Final Angle parameter is the threshold from which starting the angle measurement (normally set
to the 50% of the target torque).
Torque

Max Torque

Target Torque

Min Torque

Start Final Angle

Cycle start

Angle
Min. Angle

Target Angle

Max. Angle

Torque/angle results:
- If the torque/angle does not exceed the torque/angle limits, the result is taken at the torque
peak or angle peak as specified in the Pset options.
- If the torque/angle goes over the limit, the result is taken as follow:

Torque peak Torque peak

Angle peak Angle peak

Torque peak selected in the Pset options Angle peak selected in the Pset options

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 223 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Yellow LED Angle result between Cycle Start and Min. Angle, or torque between Min.
Torque and Max. Torque with angle under the Min. Angle.
If Measure torque/Angle at is set to Angle peak, the Start Final Angle
value is used instead of the Cycle Start.

Green LED Torque and angle results within maximum and minimum limits.

Red LED Torque result over Max. Torque or angle result over Max. Angle.

NOTE: The result LED indicating the result of the tightening is activated only when the tightening
operation is completed.

First row of yellow LEDs Torque over 1st percentage (if Torque Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).
Angle over 1st percentage (if Angle Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).

Second row of yellow LEDs Torque over 2nd percentage (if Torque Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).
Angle over 2nd percentage (if Angle Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).

Third row of yellow LEDs Torque and Angle within the minimum and maximum limits; torque or
angle having reached the target value.
It is also activated if torque or angle over the maximum value.
Torque Torque

Max. Torque
Max. Torque
Target Torque
Target Torque
Min. Torque
2nd percentage Min. Torque

1st percentage

Cycle start
Cycle start Angle
Angle
Target Angle
2nd percentage
1st percentage

Min. Angle

Max. Angle
Target Angle

Max. Angle
Min. Angle

Torque Peak Angle Peak

224 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Buzzer The beep emitted by the buzzer starts when the torque goes over the
Cycle Start value; it increases its signal when:
- Torque reaches 1st percentage
- Torque reaches 2nd percentage
- Torque and Angle within the minimum and maximum limits; torque or
angle having reached the target value.
- Max torque or Max Angle is reached.

At the end of the tightening operation two more beeps inform the
operator of the end of the operation, and if the final result is in the red
area, the buzzer signal remains steadily ON.

If Angle Peak is selected in the torque parameter in the Pset definition,


the buzzer signal works in the same way, but monitoring angle instead of
torque.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the third row of LEDs, and remains active until
the torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 225 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.6.5 Torque (Control) / Angle (Control) AND

This strategy guides to operator in reaching the desired target torque and angle.
The Start Final Angle parameter is the threshold from which angle measurement starts (normally set to
50% of the target torque).
Torque

Max Torque

Target Torque

Min Torque

Start Final Angle

Cycle start
Min. Angle

Angle
Target Angle

Max. Angle

Torque/angle results:
- If the torque/angle does not exceed the torque/angle limits, the result is taken at the torque
peak or angle peak as specified in the Pset options.
- If the torque/angle goes over the limit, the result is taken as follow:

Torque peak Torque peak

Angle peak Angle peak

Torque peak selected in the Pset options Angle peak selected in the Pset options

226 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Angle result between Cycle Start and Min. Torque, or torque between
Min. Torque and Max. Torque with angle under the Min. Angle.

If Measure torque/Angle at is set to Angle peak, the Start Final Angle


value is used instead of the Cycle Start.

Green LED Torque and angle results within maximum and minimum limits.

Red LED Torque result over Max. Torque or angle over Max. Angle.

NOTE: The result LED indicating the result of the tightening is activated only when the tightening
operation is completed.

First row of yellow LEDs Torque over 1st percentage (if Torque Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).
st
Angle over 1 percentage (if Angle Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).

Second row of yellow LEDs Torque over 2nd percentage (if Torque Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).
nd
Angle over 2 percentage (if Angle Peak is selected in the torque
parameter of the Pset definition).

Third row of yellow LEDs Torque and Angle within the minimum and maximum limits; torque and
angle having reached the target value.
It is also activated if torque or angle over the maximum value.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 227 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Torque
Torque
Max. Torque

Max. Torque
Target Torque
Target Torque
2nd percentage

1st percentage

Cycle start Cycle start

Angle Angle
Target Angle

Max. Angle

2nd percentage

Target Angle
1st percentage

Max. Angle
Torque Peak
Angle Peak

Buzzer The beep emitted by the buzzer starts when the torque goes over the
Cycle Start value; it increases its signal when the 1st percentage, the 2nd
percentage, the angle and target values, and the Max torque are reached.

At the end of the tightening operation two more beeps inform the
operator of the end of the operation, and if the final result is in the red
area, the buzzer signal is steady ON.

If Angle Peak is selected in the torque parameter in the Pset definition,


the buzzer signal works in the same way, but monitoring angle instead of
torque.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the Green LED, and remains active until the
torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

228 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.6.6 Yield Point

With this strategy the STanalyser detects the yield point automatically.
The torque limits specify the range in which the result is OK.
If the target angle (with its limits) is specified, after reaching the yield point this strategy continues
tightening to the given angle.

NOTE: The Target Angle is defined from the yield point, while the Min. Angle and the Max.
Angle are defined from the Start Final Angle.

Using a target angle is typically used when this strategy is used for tightening in production.

Torque
Yield point
Max. Torque

Min. Torque

Start final angle

Cycle start
Angle
Target Angle
Min. Angle

Max. Angle

Torque result:
- If the yield point is detected and target angle is reached, the result of the test is taken at
the target angle.
- If the operator stops the tightening after the yield point but before reaching the target
angle, the torque result is the maximum value.
- If the torque goes over the Change Screw value, the yield point is no longer detected
and the torque result is the maximum torque.

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque result between the Cycle Start and the Min. Torque value, or Min.
Torque or Max. Torque but the target has not reached.

Green LED Target Angle reached after yield point is detected (within torque and

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 229 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

angle limits).

Red LED Torque result over Max. Torque or angle result over Max. Angle.

First, second, and third row Yield point is detected (within torque limits).
of yellow LEDs

Buzzer Activated when torque goes over the Cycle Start value.
Increases its signal when the green LED is activated.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active until the
torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

10.6.6.1 Yield Point detection algorithm

To detect the yield point the following algorithm is used.

The torque/angle trace is sampled at 1 kHz.


The values Ti and Ai are calculated as moving average of 128 torque/angle samples measured by the
STanalyser. This means that each time a new value is acquired, the new Ti and Ai values are calculated:

Torque Torque
T2 and A2

T3 and A3

T1 and A1
128 samples → Ti and Ai
Angle Angle

230 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

This filtering eliminates the noise from the trace:

torque / angle samples Ti and Ai values

A window of the last 10 Ti and Ai values is considered to calculate the following parameters:
10
- Sum of the torque values = ∑T
i =1
i

10
- Sum of the angle values = ∑A
i =1
i

10
- Sum of torque values multiplied by angle values = ∑T × A
i =1
i i

10
- Sum of the square of the angle values = ∑A
i =1
i
2

From these terms calculated above, the linear regression is applied to obtain the gradient of the
torque/angle trace:
    10 
2 
 
10 10

  10  ∑=1 Ti × ∑=1 Ai 
   10 

 ∑ Ai  
 

α t =  Ti × Ai  − i
10
i
 
 ∑
  i =1
Ai2  −
i =1
10


  i =1   
   
   
 
The gradient αt is recalculated with the linear regression each time a new sample is acquired, and the
average of 20 different values αt is calculated:
20

∑α
t =1
t
α average =
20

Each time a new sample is acquired, also this average is recalculated. If 30 consecutive values of this
αaverage (absolute value) are not greater than a threshold value of 0.2, and for 1 degree they maintain under
the 1.0 (absolute value), the yield point is considered as detected:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 231 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Torque
αaverage > 0.2
αaverage < 0.2

Angle

1 degree

α average < 0.2 for 30 consecutive samples, and maintain under 1.0 (absolute value) for 1 degree →
YIELD POINT

The yield point result given by the STanalyser is the first point when the αaverage goes below 0.2.

10.6.7 Loose

This strategy is used to loosen a tightened screw. This is typically used in the Pset sequence of a
Multistage.
For example:
- Tighten the screw to 40 Nm
- Loosen the screw by 30°
- Tighten the screw to 50 Nm

If the Target Angle is left at zero, this strategy automatically looks for torque / angle values to detect if the
loosening process has been completed.
If a Target Angle value is specified, in order to consider the result as OK, loosening must reach the target
angle value; the torque result is measured at the specified Target Angle value.

232 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Torque

Max Torque

Target Torque

Min Torque

Cycle start

Target Angle Angle

The MRTT-C LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque over Cycle Start value.

Green LED Torque between Min. Torque and Max. Torque, and angle at Target
Angle (if Target Angle is not specified, angle at the necessary value to
complete the loosening operation).

Red LED Torque over Max. Torque.

First, second, and third row Angle at Target Angle, or loosening completed if Target Angle is not
of yellow LEDs specified.

Buzzer Activated together with the 3 rows of yellow LEDs.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the 3 rows of yellow LEDs, and remains active
until the torque applied is released.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 233 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.7 Quality Control Strategies for STanalyser


Residual

The quality control strategies are not the strategies used to tighten a screw; they are used to check
tightening operations already performed, through the residual torque check operation, or to study the
characteristics of a joint (Joint Analysis).
The strategies for evaluating residual torque check can be divided in two main categories:

• Breakaway: This measures the minimum torque to rotate the screw further.
• Residual Torque Peak: This simply measures the peak of the torque necessary to rotate the
screw further. The operator must stop as soon as the screw starts rotating.
• Loose and Retight: This loosens the screw for a certain degrees and measures the torque
necessary to tighten back the screw to the original position.

The paragraphs below describe in detail how the STanalyser Residual performs these strategies.

10.7.1 Yield Point (JOINT ANALYSIS)

This strategy is the same used for the yield point production strategy; in quality control you can use this to
evaluate the stiffness of a joint, extracting information about the yield point.

You need to specify the torque limits within which to look for the yield point (outside the limits the torque
trace in not analyzed).
In joint analysis the target angle is normally left set to zero, and the angle limits should be set in order to
define a wide area in which to look for the yield point (for instance, Min. Angle set to 0 and Max. Angle
set to 999 degrees).
Torque

Max Torque

Yield Point
Min Torque

Cycle start

Angle
234 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5
STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

At the end of the test the trace can be downloaded to analyze the joint in details.

The LEDs (or STanalyser LED if an IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used instead of a MRTT-C), buzzer and
vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque result between the Cycle Start and the Min. Torque value, or Min.
Torque or Max. Torque but the yield point has not been detected.

Green LED Yield point is detected (within torque limits).

Red LED Torque result over Max. Torque or angle result over Max. Angle.

First, second, and third row Yield point is detected (within torque limits).
of yellow LEDs

Buzzer Activated when the torque goes over the Cycle Start value.
Increase its signal when the yield point is detected.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active for one
second.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of Not OK result
the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the OK or CL button is pressed
on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

See the chapter Yield Point detection algorithm for the detail of the yield point algorithm.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 235 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.7.2 Residual Torque/Time

This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint, looking for the breakaway point of the Torque /
Time trace.

Torque Torque

Torque max. Torque max.

Torque min. Torque min.

Breakaway Breakaway

Cycle start
Time Cycle start
Time

Simply specify the torque limits within which to look for the breakaway point.

Since this strategy analyzes the torque trace as a function of time, it is very important that the operator
executes this operation with a single “steady” movement; the STanalyser automatically recognizes the
breakaway point at which the screw has started moving.

Torque result:
- If the breakaway point is detected (within the limits), the result of the test is OK and the
torque result is the detected breakaway.
- If the breakaway is not detected, the torque is the maximum value.
Therefore, if the maximum value falls into the limit, the torque result is still OK, but the
overall result is marked as Not OK.
- If the torque goes over the Change Screw value, the breakaway is no longer detected
and the torque result is the maximum torque.

You also need to set a Change Screw value: If during the residual torque check the operator goes over this
value, a message is shown on the STanalyser display to indicate that the screw must be replaced with a
new one.

236 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque over Cycle Start value, or click-point not detected
(and torque not exceeding the maximum value).

Green LED Breakaway point is detected (within torque limits).

Red LED Torque over Max. Torque.

First, second, and third row of yellow Breakaway point is detected (within torque limits).
LEDs
Buzzer Activated when the torque goes over the Cycle Start value.
Increase its signal when the breakaway point is detected.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active
for one second.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of
Not OK result the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the
OK or CL button is pressed on the STanalyser keyboard, or
a new test is started.

10.7.2.1 Breakaway detection algorithm

To detect the torque/time breakaway point the following algorithm is used:


The gradient αt of the torque/time trace is calculated with the linear regression each time a new sample is
acquired, and the average of 10 different values αt is calculated:
10

∑α
t =1
t
α average =
10

This αaverage is used to identify the breakaway point.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 237 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

CASE A:
Torque

αaverage > 0 Sometimes a very high static friction is built into the joint
Torque max (for instance, for no lubrication, conical seat). In that
case, as soon as the bolt moves, the torque decreases and
the real residual torque is lower than the peak torque
αaverage > 0 necessary to overcome the static friction.

αaverage < 0 The STanalyser algorithm monitors the αaverage; if it goes


Torque min
to a negative value, it waits until the αaverage goes back to
a positive value.
Start final angle
The point in which the αaverage goes back to a positive
value is considered as the breakaway torque.

Cycle start

Time

CASE B:
Torque

αaverage Normally during breakaway there is a rapid change


of the gradient of the of the torque/time function
when the bolt start moving.
Torque max
The STanalyser algorithm monitors the last 14
values αaverage: If all of them are decreasing, and the
last one is less than the 40% of the first one, the
Torque min
breakaway point is detected.
NOTE: When the algorithm detects the breakaway,
it waits anyway for 30 milliseconds in order to
monitor if the gradient goes to a negative value: In
that case the algorithm continues analyzing the
torque/time trace as described in CASE A.
Cycle start

Time

How to set parameters:

- Cycle start: This is the point from where the torque is measured. Set to a low value, but
greater than the MRTT-C minimum load.
- Torque min: Minimum breakaway value for having result OK.

238 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

- Torque max: Maximum breakaway value for having result OK.

For instance, if the bolt was tightened to 100 Nm and a MRTT-C with 150 Nm smartHEAD is used to
detect the breakaway point, it could be a proper setting:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 239 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.7.3 Residual Torque/Angle


This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint, looking for the breakaway point of the Torque /
Angle trace.
Since the torque/angle trace is less dependent on the operator’s movements, this is a more objective
method than the Breakaway Time method for measuring the breakaway point.

Torque Torque

Torque max.
Torque max.

Torque min.
Torque min.
Breakaway Start Final Angle Breakaway
Start Final Angle
Cycle start Cycle start

Angle Angle

As per the residual torque time, define the torque limits where the breakaway point is considered as OK in
the result.
The Start Final Angle, which must be greater than the Cycle start; defines the point from which the
STanalyser algorithm starts analyzing the torque/angle trace. Below that all is ignored; therefore, this
parameter set a threshold useful to filter all the noise it could be present at low torque value, and which
could be detected as a false breakaway point

Torque result:
- If the breakaway point is detected, the result is associated to the breakaway point; the
test is OK if the breakaway falls between the limits.
- If the breakaway is not detected, the torque is the maximum value.
Therefore, if the maximum value falls into the limit, the torque result is still OK, but the
overall result is marked as Not OK.
- If the torque goes over the Change Screw value, the breakaway is no longer detected
and the torque result is the maximum torque.

You can set also a Change Screw value: If the operator goes over this value during the residual torque
check, a message is shown on the STanalyser display to indicate that the screw must be replaced with a
new one.

240 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque over Cycle Start value, or click-point not detected
(and torque not exceeding the maximum value).

Green LED Breakaway point is detected (within torque limits).

Red LED Torque over Max. Torque.

First, second, and third row of yellow Breakaway point is detected (within torque limits).
LEDs
Buzzer Activated when the torque goes over Cycle Start value.
Increase its signal when the breakaway point is detected.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active
for one second.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of
Not OK result the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the
OK or CL button is pressed on the STanalyser keyboard, or
a new test is started.

10.7.3.1 Breakaway detection algorithm

To detect the torque/angle breakaway point the following algorithm is used:


The gradient αt of the torque/angle trace is calculated with the linear regression each time a new sample is
acquired, and the average of 6 different values αt is calculated:
6

∑α
t =1
t
α average =
6

This αaverage is used to identify the breakaway point.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 241 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

CASE A:
Torque

αaverage > 0 Sometimes a very high static friction is built into the joint
Torque max (for instance, for no lubrication, conical seat). In that
case, as soon as the bolt moves, the torque decreases and
the real residual torque is lower than the peak torque
αaverage > 0 necessary to overcome the static friction.

αaverage < 0 The STanalyser algorithm monitors the αaverage; if it goes


Torque min
to a negative value, it waits until the αaverage goes back to
a positive value.
Start final angle
The point in which the αaverage goes back to a positive
value is considered as the breakaway torque.

Cycle start

Angle

CASE B:
Torque

αaverage Normally during breakaway there is a rapid change


of the gradient of the of the torque/angle function
when the bolt start moving.
Torque max
The STanalyser algorithm monitors the last 10
values αaverage: If all of them are decreasing, and the
last one is less than the 50% of the first one, the
Torque min
breakaway point is detected.
NOTE: When the algorithm detects the breakaway,
it waits anyway for 0.5 degree in order to monitor if
the gradient goes to a negative value: In that case
Start final angle
the algorithm continues analyzing the torque/angle
trace as described in CASE A.
Cycle start

Angle

How to set parameters:

- Cycle start: This is the point from where the torque is measured. Set to a low value, but
greater than the MRTT-C minimum load.
- Start final angle: Set this value between Cycle Start and Torque Min.

242 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

- Torque min: Minimum breakaway value for having result OK.


- Torque max: Maximum breakaway value for having result OK.

For instance, if the bolt was tightened to 100 Nm and a MRTT-C with 150 Nm smartHEAD is used to
detect the breakaway point, it could be a proper setting:
Torque

Angle

In the torque/angle trace, the torque is


left to zero until when torque reaches
the Start Final Angle (50 Nm). The
circle on the trace indicates the
detected breakaway point.
If the breakaway point falls outside
the torque limits, it is marked as Not
Break away
OK with .

Start final angle

Cycle start

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 243 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.7.4 Residual Torque/Peak

This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint as the peak of the torque necessary to rotate the screw
further.
Since it does not recognize the breakaway point automatically, this is a less objective method for
evaluating residual torque; it may be used in cases in which the residual torque/time or torque/angle
methods cannot be performed.

Torque

Max Torque

Torque Peak

Min Torque

Cycle start Angle

Simply specify the torque limits within which to look for the breakaway point.
If the Target Angle is not specified, the angle result is marked as Not Applicable.
If you specify a Target Angle value, the torque result is measured at the specified angle (starting from the
Start final angle) instead of the torque peak:
Torque

Max Torque

Torque Peak
Min Torque

Start final angle


Cycle start
Angle

You also need to set a Change Screw value: If the operator goes over this value, a message is shown on
the STanalyser display to indicate that the screw must be replaced with a new one.

244 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

The LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque over Cycle Start value.

Green LED Peak within torque limits and angle at Target Angle (if
Target Angle is specified).

Red LED Torque over Max. Torque.

First, second, and third row of yellow Activated together with the green LED.
LEDs
Buzzer Activated when the torque goes over the Cycle Start value.
Increase its signal when the peak is detected.

Vibration (MRTT-C only) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active
for one second.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of
Not OK result the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the
OK or CL button is pressed on the STanalyser keyboard, or
a new test is started.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 245 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.7.5 Loose and Retight

Breakaway is by far the best and most commonly used method. But, when a bolt has been tightened some
time ago and there is rust or other conditions which could increase static torque, the suggested evaluation
method is to loosen the bolt and re-tighten it back to the original position.

Loosening: Retightening:
Torque Torque

Angle Angle

Target angle Target angle

Specify the torque limits. The residual torque result is the torque at the end of the retightening operation
(measured at the target angle).
The Target Angle is usually set to a few degrees; if it is set too high, torque during the opening phase
could go under the cycle start value; in that case, the angle counting would stop, making the test
impossible.
You can set also a Change Screw value: If the operator goes over this value during retightening, a
message is shown on the STanalyser display to indicate that the screw must be replaced with a new one.

The LEDs, buzzer and vibration devices are activated as follows:

Yellow LED Torque over Cycle Start value during loosening.

Green LED Retightening completed (within torque limits).

Red LED Torque over Max. Torque.

First, second, and third row of yellow Target Angle reached during loosening.
LEDs
Buzzer One signal when the Target Angle reached during
loosening.
One signal when retightening is completed (within the
torque limits).

246 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Vibration (MRTT-C) Activated together with the green LED, and remains active
for one second.
If the option Vibrate on NOK results is enabled, in case of
Not OK result the MRTT-C vibrates continuously, until the
OK or CL button is pressed on the STanalyser keyboard, or
a new test is started.

10.8 STanalyser Production and Residual Settings

10.8.1 STanalyser Display Language


To set the STanalyser display language, select Settings → Language from the STanalyser main menu:

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to change the language.


(The language can be set also by the ToolsTalk BLM).

10.8.2 STanalyser Date and Time


To set the STanalyser date and time, select Settings → Insert Date – Time from the STanalyser main
menu:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 247 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Click on OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to set the date and time. The Time is shown on the
STanalyser display, while the Date is only associated to the test results.
The date format (European or American) can be set from the Settings → Date menu.

10.8.3 Maximum transducer overload


Enter the Settings → Transducer Over from the STanalyser main menu to define the maximum overload
for the transducers connected to the STanalyser:

NOTE: This function is active only in the track and peak menus of the Free Mode.

Click on OK button on the STanalyser to edit the value.


The percentage value specified here is applied to the full scale of the transducer connected to the
STanalyser, to determine the maximum torque applicable to the transducer. It can be set from 90% to
110%.
If during the test the torque goes over the maximum value, the related error message is displayed:

Press the OK button on the STanalyser display to exit this error window.

248 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.4 STanalyser Production and Residual controller setup

In the Controller section of the STanalyser Map you can access the STanalyser settings:

The Toolsnet and IRC-W API settings menus are described in the dedicate chapters for ToolsNet and API
interface.

NOTE: While performing STanalyser settings by ToolsTalk BLM, leave the STanalyser in the
main menu, and do not enter any menu until settings are completed and stored in the
STanalyser.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 249 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.1 Configuration

By selecting the Configuration submenu the following window is shown:

10.8.4.1.1 Settings STanalyser name

Device Name Name which is reported in the STanalyser Map:

250 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.4.1.2 Settings STanalyser date and time


Date and time appearing on the main menu of the display. This date and
time are associated to the tightening results and traces.

Date and time device


Click on to align the STanalyser date and time to the date and time of
your PC connected to the device.

10.8.4.1.3 Enabling Tool Recognition

Enables the tool recognition and TAG writer functions on the MRTT-
C. When enabled, a tightening program is not started if an end fitting
tool with RFID TAG is not plugged into the MRTT-C.

NOTE: If disabled, the torque and angle correction coefficients


Tag enabled
possibly defined into the TAG of the end fitting tool is not considered
during the tightening (see TAG Writer). This means that if an
extension is used with TAG disabled, the correction coefficients need
to be specified in the Pset Options).

10.8.4.1.4 Enabling MRTT-C Vibration Device

Enables the vibration device on the MRTT-C.

If enabled, the option Vibrate on NOK results makes the MRTT-C


Device vibration vibrating continuously in case of Not OK results, until pressing the
OK or CL button on the STanalyser keyboard, or a new test is started.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 251 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.1.5 Enabling STanalyser Free Mode

Free Mode enabled Enables the free mode function on the main menu of the STanalyser.

10.8.4.1.6 Enabling STanalyser Settings menu

Menu settings enabled Enables the Settings on the main menu of the STanalyser.

10.8.4.1.7 Enabling MRTT-C illuminating Light

Device light on Enables the illuminating light device on the MRTT-C.

10.8.4.1.8 Enabling STanalyser buzzer

Device sounds on Enables the buzzer device on the STanalyser.

10.8.4.1.9 Enabling warning message for Job skip

Enables the confirmation message before skipping a Pset/Multistage


Job skip confirm availability during the Job execution.

10.8.4.1.10 Enabling Pset/Multistage/Job grouping in Prog. Mode

If active, when accessing the Prog. Mode menu the Psets,


Multistages and Jobs are grouped into 3 different folders:

Group menu enabled

If this option is disabled, the second screen is not shown, and all the
Pset, Multistage and Job are shown together in the same list

252 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.4.1.11 Enabling the result confirmation

Results confirmation option This parameter is not active in this software version.

10.8.4.1.12 Set batch increment options

Selects if the batch number for a Pset/Multistage is incremented only


if the result is OK, or if it is incremented anyway, regardless of the
Batch increment condition
result (OK + NOK).

10.8.4.1.13 Enabling STanalyser automatic shutdown

Sets the timeout for automatic shutdown when the STanalyser is


switched on but not being used and not connected to ToolsTalk BLM.
Automatic shutdown timeout
Leave it set to zero to disable automatic shutdown.

10.8.4.1.14 Enabling STanalyser general display timeout

This option defines how long the display shows the information
before going into the next screen; it is applied to all those situations
when the STanalyser continues to the next step without requiring the
operator to press a button on the keyboard.

For example, this value defines how long the low battery warning is
displayed before continuing the operation.
General display timeout
The valid value of the parameter is 0.0 to 6.0. The value 0.0 means no
timeout. In that case, to proceed to the next screen the OK button
must be pressed on the keyboard.

NOTE: The default value is 1.5. It is recommended to not set the


value to low; a message may result unreadable otherwise.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 253 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.1.15 Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection

Source program This setting defines the way in which a Pset /Multistage/Job is started.

Keyboard: Manual Pset/multistage selection, from the Prog. Mode menu on the
display. Selecting a different option the Prog. Mode menu is disabled.

TAG: Automatic Pset/Multistage selection with tool recognition. Ensure that the
Tag enabled flag is activated.
NOTE: A Job cannot be selected with this function; therefore, if this
method is used to select the various Pset/Multistage, the Job function on
the STanalyser cannot be used.

Bar Code: Automatic Pset/Multistage/Job selection with bar code reading. If a


Pset/Multistage has the same barcode as a Job, the Job has priority and is executed
first. See the chapter Identifierfor details of this working mode.
When Bar Code is selected, the Prog. Mode in the main menu is not shown.
NOTE: A Job cannot be selected with this function; therefore, if this
method is used to select the various Pset/Multistage, the Job function on
the STanalyser cannot be used.

API: Pset/Multistage/Job selected by API interface.

Sub source job If the Job has been defined as Free, this specifies how to select the Pset/Multistage
of the Job. Choose between Keyboard, TAG, Bar Code, or API.

If the Job has been defined as Forced, the Pset/Multistage are executed in the given
order (specified in the Job definition), and this setting does not affect job execution.

10.8.4.1.16 Setting the STanalyser display language

Select the language of the STanalyser menu. This is also possible


Device language from the STanalyser Settings menu.

10.8.4.1.17 Setting the STanalyser date format

Select between European and American format.


Device date format
This is applied to the date appearing on the STanalyser main menu.

254 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.4.1.18 Enabling the warning message for full memory

Enabling this option, the STanalyser will advice the user when the
memory is getting full of results. When the memory gets full, the
newest results overwrite the oldest results; oldest results are deleted
and no longer available.
Warning on buffer results full
If this option is enabled, the field Threshold specifies when the
warning message is displayed. For example, settings the threshold to
10, the warning message is shown when the memory reach the value
5000 maximum results – threshold = 4990 results.

10.8.4.1.19 Configuring the “results” menu on the STanalyser

Results field

Select three fields to be displayed in the Results option of the STanalyser


main menu.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 255 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.2 Information

This window provides some general information about serial number, STanalyser type and firmware
version, and battery charge status:

10.8.4.3 LED settings


For STanalyser Production only, in this area is possible to customize the thresholds for the 3 rows of
yellow LEDs on the MRTT-C; during a tightening operation (in Torque or Angle) the 3 rows of LEDs are
illuminated when the torque or angle, depending on the tightening strategy, reaches certain percentages of
the target value.
By setting the 3 thresholds in the Common settings window, these are applied to all the tightening
strategies in which the 3 rows of LEDs are activated on the base of these percentages (for instance, this is
not applied to the Yield Point strategies, where all the LEDs are activated together when the yield point is
detected):

256 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Use the mouse, or the LEFT and RIGHT arrows on the PC keyboard, to set the values and click on Apply
to save.

In the Custom settings window is possible to define different thresholds for the various tightening
strategies:

By using the mouse or the LEFT and RIGHT arrows on the PC keyboard, set the values and click on Apply
to save.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 257 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.4 Memory

From this menu is possible to set the options for saving the tightening traces, to define the minimum load
default value, and to delete the objects stored into the STanalyser RBU and memory.

NOTE: These settings are not saved in the RBU.

10.8.4.4.1 Traces settings

In the Configuration →Traces settings menu, you can customize the number and size of the tightening
traces saved in the STanalyser memory. By decreasing the number of traces manageable, the maximum
length of each trace (corresponding duration) increases. These are the options available:

Number or Traces Maximum length of each trace (second)


10 30

5 60

3 90

2 150

1 300

The default value is 10 traces, maximum 30 seconds length each.

NOTE: When decreasing the number of traces manageable, the traces possibly stored in the
STanalyser memory get deleted.

Click on Apply to store the setting.

258 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.4.4.2 Deleting RBU objects

In the Configuration → Reset menu, it is possible to delete objects from the STanalyser memory:

Delete RBU objects Delete all the Psets/Multistages/Jobs (and Type 1 strings of the identifiers) from
the RBU.

NOTE: If the tightening programs are not saved in a .sta file, with this operation
all of them are deleted with no chance to restore them any longer.

Delete results Erase all of the results stored into the STanalyser memory.

Delete Traces Erase all of the traces stored into the STanalyser memory.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 259 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.4.5 Ethernet configuration

From this menu it is possible to configure the network parameters to connect the STanalyser to ToolsTalk
BLM or to API. See the Connecting to the STanalyser, Working with Torque Supervisor and Working with
the API chapter for details.

10.8.5 Tool setup

The Tool section of the STanalyser Map accesses the MRTT-C information and TAG number
programming:

260 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.5.1 Information

This window provides some information about the transducer currently to the STanalyser:

Serial number Serial number of the MRTT-C.

Calibration value Calibration value of the MRTT-C currently connected to the STanalyser.

Cell sensitivity (gain) Transducer gain (set to 2, or 0.8, or 0.59).

Span Value set by factory to 100%, or 120%, or 150%, or 200%.


This value, multiplied by the Calibration value, gives the MRTT-C capacity.

Min. Load Minimum torque value readable from the MRTT-C connected to the
STanalyser.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 261 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

Transducer capacity Maximum torque value applicable. This is normally slightly higher than the
nominal capacity marked on the MRTT-C.

Cell zero value Zero factory value for the torque transducer.

Cell zero date Last calibration date of the MRTT-C.

Gyroscope present This flag is automatically enabled if the current smartHEAD plugged into the
MRTT-C has the gyroscope installed. If yes, the next two fields are also
shown.

Gyroscope zero value Zero factory value for the gyroscope (inside smartHEAD).

Gyroscope zero time Last calibration date of the gyroscope.

Overloaded, value and In case the smartHEAD has been overloaded, the related information is
date shown here. In case of multiple overloads, the highest one is recorded.

Number of tightenings Counter of the tightening operations executed by the transducer.

Value of maximum Maximum torque value measured on the transducer and related date.
measured torque and
Date of maximum
measured torque
If a IRTT-B or QRTT-B is used instead of a MRTT-C, the gyroscope parameters are not shown and they
are substituted by the Count per revolution, which is the number of impulses per revolution marked on the
IRTT-B / QRTT-B label (note: The STanalyser multiplies them by four considering the rising and falling
edges of both the “cw lead” and “cw trail” signals).

262 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

10.8.5.2 TAG Writer

The MRTT-C features the reading/writing function of the end fitting tool TAG.
Reading the TAG number can be used to automatically select the Pset/Multistage to be executed (see the
Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection chapter), or to check that the proper end fitting tool is
used during Pset/Multistage execution.

From this window you can write the TAG number of the end fitting tool currently mounted on the MRTT-
C:

TAG number of the end fitting


tool present in the MRTT-C

10.8.5.2.1 Reading the TAG number

When this window is opened, the TAG number connected to the MRTT-C is read and its number is
displayed in the figure. The refresh button refreshes the reading.

10.8.5.2.2 Writing the TAG number

To write a new value in the TAG, simply edit the TAG value field and click on Set.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 263 (383)


STanalyser Production and Residual STanalyser User Guide

10.8.5.2.3 Torque and Angle correction coefficients

The end fitting tool stores two coefficients to correct the torque and angle reading. These coefficients are
used to correct the torque and angle measure when an extension is used on the MRTT-C.

NOTE: These coefficients are not considered in the Free Mode.


They are also not considered if the tool recognition function on the STanalyser is disabled.

Torque and Angle correction


coefficients

When using an extension, the black end fitting tool should be welded to the extension in
order to maintain the automatic tool recognition.

If these two coefficients are already known, simply write them in this window and click on Set to store
them in the RFID TAG of the end fitting tool plugged into the smartHEAD. The Angle coefficient is
referred to a Torque nominal, which must specified together with the coefficient. The Torque Nominal is
the torque value at which the bending angle has been measured.
If these two coefficients are not already known, see the chapter Appendix A – Calculating Correction
Coefficients for MRTT-C Extensions for the detailed procedure to calculate them. The Start c.c.a.
procedure option is not active in this software version.

NOTE: It is also possible to define these coefficients in the Pset parameters (see the Pset
Options) instead of writing them in the end fitting tool TAG. This can be used when you use an
extension without the black end fitting tool.
In general, when defining the coefficients in the Pset parameters, leave the Torque Correction
Coefficient set to 1, and the Angle Correction Coefficient set to 0, in the RFID TAG of the end
fitting tool; if different values are specified, the STanalyser corrects torque and angle reading
considering all of them (the two torque correction coefficients are multiplied, while the two
angle correction coefficients are summed).

264 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser Production and Residual

Warning: The torque correction coefficient alters the STanalyser torque measurement; a wrong
value of this coefficient may cause an improper torque reading, leading to the risk of executing
a tightening at a different target torque compared to what is expected. Ensure the proper value is
calculated when a wrench extension is used. For end-fitting tools used without extensions, the
torque correction coefficient must be left set to 1.

10.8.5.2.4 Compatibility between different end fitting tools

Only the following type of end fitting tool is supported by the MRTT-C:

Short RFID TAG

NOTE: If this tool is already used by the LINEwrench, it is not read by the MRTT-
C/STanalyser. However, once it has been written with the TAG writer function, it can be read
and used by the STanalyser; when this is done the tool will not work any longer with the
LINEwrench.

It is not possible to use old end fitting tools designed for the LINEwrench:

Long RFID TAG

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 265 (383)


STanalyser AA STanalyser User Guide

11 STanalyser AA (Advanced Analysis)

The STanalyser AA (Advanced Analysis) is an instrument developed to cover all the quality test of both
tools and joints. It features all of the functions available in the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A, with an
additional menu (Residual Check) providing the tests available in the Residual versions. Angle
measurement is included.

NOTE: In the AA versions, the Job function, available in the Residual version, is not
implemented.

The tests must be programmed by the ToolsTalk BLM, which can retrieve the test results.
The main menu is the following:

Free Mode Conduct a free test, without the need of programming the STanalyser with
ToolsTalk BLM.
Tools This menu contains the list of tools to be tested by the STanalyser, as per the
STanalyser Tool Crib T/A.

Residual Check This menu contains the list of joints to be tested by the STanalyser, as per
the STanalyser Residual.
Settings Enter this menu to customize the STanalyser AA settings.

Results This menu shows all of the results present in the STanalyser memory. See
the Results Viewer chapter for details.
Transducers This menu permits to view the information of the transducer connected (for
ACTA transducer), or to select a non-ACTA transducer for the tests. See the
chapter Transducers for details.

NOTE: It is possible to activate an extra menu “Route” (and it is also possible to disable the
“Tools” menu), for the use of the STanalyser in conjunction with Torque Supervisor. See the
Working with Torque Supervisor chapter for details.

266 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide STanalyser AA

For the STanalyser AA operations, refer to the following chapters:


• Tool testing → Use of the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A and Tool testing (Tool Crib T and T/A,
STanalyser without RBU, AA).
• Residual test on joints → STanalyser Production and Residual, referring to the functions and Pset
strategy applicable to the Residual and not to Production.

11.1 STanalyser AA settings

The STanalyser AA settings are a merge between the settings of the STanalyser Tool Crib T/A and
Residual versions:

NOTE: While performing STanalyser settings by ToolsTalk BLM, leave the STanalyser in the
main menu, and do not enter any menu until settings are completed and stored in the
STanalyser.
Refer to the specific chapters for STanalyser Tool Crib T/A and Residual versions for details of settings.
Note that some of the settings are disabled for the AA version, as shown in the figure above.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 267 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

12 Identifier
NOTE: This chapter is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

The Identifier section describes the identifier concept, functions and settings.

It is possible to define a maximum number of 300 identifier strings in the STanalyser memory.
An identifier, or barcode string, can be used for example to select Psets/Multistages/Jobs or Tool, identify
motor vehicles (VIN) and other work pieces, variants, and operators. The tightening result can then be
saved together with this information.

268 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

12.1 Identifier Concepts


There are three ways to use the identifier function, all of which may be used independently of each other:
To select a Pset/Multistage/Job/Tool through scanning a barcode string (only Type 1).
To create a work order for identification of, for example, work pieces connected to a tightening.
To store additional information on the tightening result.
An identifier (barcode) string can have different standards and lengths. It can be scanned and stored as it
is, but the STanalyser can also be configured to identify parts of the string. These parts are called
significant strings.
The Type 1 identifier can be configured for selection of Pset/Multistage/Job/Tool in addition to being
stored as additional information on the tightening result or being selected in a work order.
The Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4 identifiers can be stored as additional information to the tightening result
or be selected in a work order.
A significant string is a set of characters within a barcode string that can be defined.
The significant positions are the positions where the significant strings are located.
A work order consists of different types of identifiers (Type 1 is mandatory). It is configured when the
STanalyser should receive identifiers in a predefined order. An identifier not included in the work order is
called an Optional identifier. An optional identifier must not be identical to an identifier included in the
work order.
The Result part is additional information stored together with each tightening result. This information can
come from one or more of the defined identifier types independently. The additional information from the
result parts is displayed in the Result Viewer.
Example:

An airbag is mounted in a car.


Type 1 represents the airbag which can be of different
variants that need different Psets. Type 2 represents the car
(VIN) and type 3 identifies the workstation.
A work order is configured where Type 2 (VIN) and type 3
(workstation) have to be scanned before type 1 (airbag).

Each tightening result from the Psets listed under type 1 is stored with the VIN, the airbag ID, and the
workstation ID.
The STanalyser shows the Work order on the display, and the Result viewer shows the tightening result.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 269 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

12.2 Identifier Prerequisites and Details

Prerequisites for significant strings:


- 50 significant strings can be set for type 1.
- A string can only be added once in Type 1.
- A Pset, Multistage, Job or Tool ID can be added to any string of type 1.
- The number of characters in the significant string (for example 10) must be the same as the number of
significant positions.
- The length can be max 100 characters.
- Only numbers and capitals letters are accepted.
Type Max scanned Max significant Max significant Max stored
characters positions strings characters
Type 1 100 50 200 25
Type 2 100 50 1 25
Type 3 100 50 1 25
Type 4 100 50 1 25

Prerequisites for incoming data:


- Identifiers can only be read by the STanalyser barcode reader.
Prerequisites for result parts:
- The information from the identifier types can be displayed in the result parts independently of result part
number. For example, all result parts can display information from Type 1.
- A work order must be completed before the STanalyser stores the accepted identifiers in the result and
selects the next Pset/Multistage/Job or Tool.

270 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

12.3 Configuration of Identifier Functions

12.3.1 Configuring identifiers

The procedure for setting identifiers differs between identifier types 1 and types 2, 3 and 4. Always start
with Type 1.
Click on the Identifier icon in the STanalyser map or in the main tool bar:

Select Device scanner as the input source, or OFF, to enable or disable the various barcode types; type 1
is mandatory.
Set the Length for each type; if not specified, there is no length check.
Click on Set to open the following pop-up window for significant position setup:

Mark the significant positions for the identifier. The positions can be selected freely. Click on OK.
To define the significant string for identifier Type 1, click on Set Strings; the following window is shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 271 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

Click on Add row and enter the identifier string to add a string to be associated with a
Pset/Multistage/Job/Tool (the Multistage, Job and Tool are available depending from the RBU type).
Click on Remove row to delete a row, and use the arrows in the tool bar to move the selected row.
For each Identifier string, double-click to edit.
When creating or modifying an identifier string, the following window is shown:

Identifier string

Select Pset or Tool


Search function

Associate the Pset or Tool to the


identifier string

Enter the identifier string and associate a Pset/Multistage/Job or a Tool. Enter a text in the filter function
to filter and display only the items containing the text entered.

NOTE: The same Pset/Multistage/Job/Tool can be associated with different identifier strings,
while each identifier string must be different from all the others.

272 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

NOTE: If the barcode reading is required for the Pset/Multistage/Job/Tool, and is not the source
program, it is possible to specify only the Length without any Significant positions and
Significant strings. In this case, to start the Pset/Multistage the STanalyser is required to scan
any barcode of the defined length:

If not desired, the length may also be left undefined (-); in this
case any barcode reading is accepted.

When finished, click on OK.

Click Store to save the settings, or continue with:


• Configuring a new type of identifier
• Configuring a work order
• Configuring Result parts

12.3.2 Configuring a work order

Add identifier types to the work order, and arrange the correct order using the arrow buttons.
NOTE: Identifier type 1 must always be included in the work order

Moves the selected identifier type.

Moves all identifier types.

Shift up the selected identifier type in


the Work order.

Shift down the selected identifier type


in the Work order.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 273 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

The identifier types added to the Work order are mandatory to start the Pset/Multistage/Job, and needs to
be scanned by the STanalyser in the order specified here; the identifier types left as Optional are left as
optional.

12.3.3 Configuring result parts

In the result part area is possible to select which identifier types, or which portions of them, must be
included in the tightening results.
Four result parts are available; for each one, set the identifier type source and the significant positions to
be considered.

In the example shown in the figure, the first and second result part take a portion of the identifiers type 1
and 2; Identifier type 3 is split into result part 3 (first 4 characters) and result part 4 (last 4 characters).

When a Job is selected by barcode reading, the Result part 1 can be associated to the identifier string
starting the Job, for all the Pset composing the Job. See Job Errore. L'origine riferimento non è stata
trovata..

The result parts are associated with barcode, barcode 2, barcode 3 and barcode 4 in the Result Viewer.

274 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

12.3.4 Printing identifier strings

Once the identifiers have been defined, a useful tool generates a printout of the identifiers.
Click on Print strings identifiers to generate the following preview (available only for strings not
exceeding 50 characters):

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 275 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

Maximum 50 characters for


printing in this page

If the identifier has more characters than specified in the Significant strings, or if the identifier length is
not specified, the unspecified characters are automatically filled in with an X in this printout.

The commands on the toolbar can be used to print out or export this page:

Print the page.


Export the page to an Excel file (export to PDF is active but does not support the
barcode font).

276 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

12.4 Scanning Identifiers with STanalyser

Using the example set of the identifiers shown in the previous paragraph for a STanalyser Production,
following is the sequence needed to start a Pset/Multistage/Job by reading the identifiers.
NOTE: The source program for the STanalyser must be set to Barcode.

Identifiers

Work order

With the STanalyser in the main menu, scan the first identifier (Type 2 in this example) in the specified
working order:

The STanalyser display shows that the first identifier (Type 2) in the given working order has been read.
Scan the next identifier:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 277 (383)


Identifier STanalyser User Guide

The STanalyser display shows that the second identifier (Type 3) in the given working order has been
read.
Scan the optional identifier (the optional identifier can be scanned anytime in the working order
sequence):

278 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Identifier

The STanalyser display also shows that the optional identifier (Type 4) has been read:

To start the test, simply scan one of the Type 1 barcodes:

After having scanned the Type 1 barcode, the STanalyser automatically starts the associated Pset.

NOTE: By pressing the CL button on the STanalyser keyboard during the identifier reading
sequence, the STanalyser exits to the main menu and cancels the readings already done; by
pressing the OK button on the keyboard, the STanalyser exits to the main menu without
canceling the readings already done, continuing the identifiers reading.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 279 (383)


Results Viewer STanalyser User Guide

13 Results Viewer
The results can be viewed in details by ToolsTalk BLM.

It is possible to view them also from the Results menu from the main menu of the STanalyser.
For all the STanalyser versions, select Results from the main menu:

STanalyser without RBU Tool Crib Production and Residual

STanalyser AA

The following window is shown:

Result number 1

The results are ordered from the newest to the oldest. Therefore, the first result shown at the top of the
page is the last tightening executed.
If a tool is deleted after some tests were executed, the associated results are deleted and shown as “--- --- --
-“ in the viewer; scroll the results to view the other results.

The selection of three fields shown can be customized by ToolsTalk BLM in the Controller →
Configuration menu. The results shown here are all of the results stored in the STanalyser memory,
regardless the RBU type installed; even the results from tests executed with a different RBU are shown
here.

Select one of the results shown in the list and press the OK button to see more details:

280 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Result Viewer

If some of the fields are not applicable, they are marked with “—“. Press the CL button to quit this
window.

To retrieve the results with ToolsTalk BLM, click on the Results viewer icon:

The STanalyser can store up to 5000 results; when the memory is full the new results overwrite the oldest
results stored.

Select/deselect
all the tests

Search / filter
Select manually the tests
functions

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 281 (383)


Results Viewer STanalyser User Guide

Select what you wish to review and click on OK. The following window is shown:

Click on a column to sort the results according to the column name.


All of the information related to the tightening operation is displayed in the various columns.
Here are the most important fields:

Pset number For STanalyser without RBU, this number is automatically set to
65532 for click wrench test, 65533 for power tool test, 65534 for
peak test and 65531 for pulse tool test.
For STanalyser with RBU, this is the Pset number as defined in the
Pset data.

Status This is the global status of the test. It is OK when the result has
been detected according to the thresholds and limits specified, and
if the torque does not exceed the maximum transducer overload.

Torque Status These fields indicate the result for the torque. If the result is within
the torque limits (for STanalyser without RBU within the
transducer maximum overload, defined into the STanalyser
Settings menu), the status is OK.
If the Check Type in the Pset parameters is set to Angle, the torque
status is marked as OK regardless the torque is inside or outside the
torque limits specified in the Pset.

282 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Result Viewer

If the torque goes over the maximum transducer overload the result
is marked as HIGH.

Angle Status These fields indicate the result for the angle. If the result is within
the angle limits the status is OK.
If the Check Type in the Pset parameters is set to Torque, the angle
status is marked as OK regardless the angle is inside or outside the
torque limits specified in the Pset.

This is applicable only for STanalyser Tool Crib T/A.

Result number Progressive number automatically assigned by the STanalyser to


every tightening result.
Min value: 1
Max value: 5000
When 5000 results are stored in the STanalyser memory, the new
results overwrite the oldest starting from result number 1.

Strategy Type of test executed.

Torque result and Angle results Torque and angle values measured by the STanalyser.

Date / Time Fields indicating the date and time of the tightening operation. Date
and time are taken from the date and time set on the STanalyser

Batch status If the batch size is left to zero, the Batch status is always OK.
If the batch size is set to one or more, the Batch status is OK when
all the Psets of the batch are OK.

Unit of Measurement Unit of measurement.

Result detailed This field can be very helpful. It explains the reason for a Not OK
test. The field is available only for STanalyser Tool Crib versions.

Some fields (for example: Barcode, Barcode 2, Barcode 3, Barcode 4) are available only for STanalyser
Production and Residual versions.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 283 (383)


Results Viewer STanalyser User Guide

13.1 Export Results to Excel

Select/deselect
all the tests
Select manually the
tests to be exported

Select the tests to be exported or saved, and using the command Open with Excel and Save to File you
can open this table with Excel and save the results in an Excel (.xls) file, or in a .csv file, or in a .XML
file.

NOTE: The .CSV file is formatted with the semicolon (;) as field separator.
If the .CSV file is not opened automatically with Excel, from the Excel menu select Data →
Import Data, select the .CSV file, and select the “semicolon” option in the import wizard:

13.2 Create Report

This selection is not available


for STanalyser Production and
Residual versions

284 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Result Viewer

Using the command Show report the following report is created:

Click here to show the


additional commands to
save / export the report.

The report changes according to the STanalyser version. In the figure above is shown the report for the
STanalyser without RBU. In the Tool Crib T and Tool Crib T/A versions the results are grouped per
batches; if the batch was not enabled, results are be shown anyway, but the header fields are marked as
Not Applicable (N.A.).

The report can be printed, or exported to a PDF, RFT, XLS, TXT or TIFF file.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 285 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

14 Traces Viewer

NOTE: This chapter is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

Click on the traces viewer icon to retrieve the traces from the STanalyser.

Per default, the STanalyser can store up to 10 traces 30 s maximum length each; when the memory is full,
the new traces overwrite the oldest traces stored. It is possible to change the default settings to store less
traces with bigger size. See the paragraph Memory inside chapter STanalyser Production and Residual
Settings.

286 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces Viewer

14.1 View One Trace

Select the trace to view by clicking on the bar in the top part of the window:

Select the trace Trace of the last tightening

Graph Toolbar

The trace related to the last tightening operation executed by the STanalyser is marked as LAST.

In the Traces, Limits and Results areas it is possible to select what to display on the graph:

Select what
to view on Result Torque max. limit
the graph

Trace

Torque min. limit

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 287 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

It is possible to select the Torque/Time, Angle/Time or Torque/Angle graphs.


If limits and results are enabled, they are shown in the graph; the Result indicates on the trace the point in
which the result is taken. If the result is Not OK, it is marked with a red X:

To zoom in on a section of the trace, simply select the desired area with the mouse:

Select the area to Right click to navigate in


zoom in the zoom trace

While zoom in, to navigate the graph right click on the trace and move the mouse pointer on the graph.

To zoom out to the whole trace, press the left button on the mouse, move the cursor up/leftward, and
release the left button:

288 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces viewer

2. Move up/leftward and release click

1. Click anywhere in the trace area

The Trace parameters window displays detailed information on the trace:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 289 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

To evaluate the trace in details, click on Show cursor to activate the cursor on the graph.

290 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces viewer

Show Cursor

Cursor

Trace data at the cursor


position

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 291 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

14.2 Traces Comparison


This feature overlaps the traces for a comparison of the tightening operations.

Click on Trace comparison to open the comparison window:

Select the traces to compare

Select on the left side of the screen the traces you wish to compare.

Select the type of graph (Torque/Time, Angle/Time, or Torque/Angle) using the Traces scroll window
The selected traces are displayed in the graph. You can hide the selected curve using the selection box
displayed under the graph.

292 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces viewer

Select the type of graph

Traces parameters Hide / Display the traces

In the Traces parameters window all the parameters and results of the traces are displayed. Click on the +
or – icons to expand or collapse the nodes.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 293 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

By enabling Highlight trace it is possible to highlight a trace in the graph:

Enable Highlight trace

Select the trace to


highlight

294 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces viewer

14.3 Copy, Print and Export Traces

Some useful commands are available in the graph toolbar:

Print the trace.

Copy the trace to the clipboard.


Export trace as image:

Select the format to be exported, the size and options, then click on
Save... to export the trace.

It is also possible to export traces to the PC, in a .ttt file, so that they can be re-viewed offline at a later
time.
To export the traces from the STanalyser memory, connect ToolsTalk BLM to the STanalyser and select
the Tools → Offline traces → Export traces menu:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 295 (383)


Traces viewer STanalyser User Guide

The following window is shown:


Select only the traces loaded
in the traces viewer window.

Select all
the traces

Select
manually the
traces

Select the traces to be exported and click on Export to create the file. In the combo-box in the upper-right
area of this window, choose one of the following options in case the file already exists:
• Overwrite: Overwrite the old file with the new one; the traces in the old file are deleted.
• Append: Append the traces selected to the existing file (in case a trace was already exported, a
copy of the same traces is appended to the others)
• Abort: Do not save the new file.

To load a set of traces exported earlier, select the Tools → Offline traces → Export traces menu:

296 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Traces viewer

Select the file exported earlier and the traces are loaded in a traces viewer window:
Offline traces

File information

More than one file can be opened at the same time (each file is opened in a new trace viewer window).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 297 (383)


Real Time Traces STanalyser User Guide

15 Real Time Traces

The Real Time Traces function provides a new window with the real-time tightening trace for each test
executed.
The STanalyser must be connected to the ToolsTalk BLM via USB cable. It is also possible to use this
function via IRC-W, if the RBU installed in the STanalyser includes the API; see the Working with the
API chapter for details about how to enable the Real Time Traces via IRC-W.

NOTE: This function must be enabled in the STanalyser settings. It is not available for the
STanalyser without RBU and for pulse tools test.

Once the function is enabled, the following window is shown by ToolsTalk BLM when a Pset is executed:

Previous
Test result traces

Ongoing
test

Click to expand
the trace

298 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Real Time Traces

After each test the traces is minimized on the right area of the window, and the new trace is shown.
Click on the icon to the right to review the traces. After 30 traces are shown, a new real time traces
window is automatically created to display the next 30 traces, and so on.
Click on the show tightening data icon to view the details of the test:

Show tightening data

Tightening data

For each test strategy the torque/time, angle/time and torque/angle traces, depending from the STanalyser
settings, can be shown:
• In real time: The trace is drawn in real time during the tightening
• Hidden: The trace is not shown
• At the end of the tightening: The trace is not shown during the tightening. When the tightening is
completed, the trace is shown
In the STanalyser settings it is also possible to set the real time trace to be shown in full screen.
The torque/time, angle/time and torque/angle traces can be expanded by clicking on the expand icon. The
trace is shown in a new window (angle/time and torque/angle are available only when the angle
information is present in the test):

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 299 (383)


Real Time Traces STanalyser User Guide

It is possible to zoom in and out the trace, print or export the trace with the same commands provided by
the Traces Viewer function. See the Traces Viewer chapter for details.
As per the traces viewer function, also the real time traces window provides the exporting of the traces to
the PC. Click on the Save command to create the file:

Export traces

The following window is shown:

300 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Real Time Traces

Select the traces to be exported and click on export to create the file. In the combo-box in the upper-right
area of this window, choose on of the following options in case the file already exists:
• Overwrite: Overwrite the old file with the new one; the traces in the old file are deleted.
• Append: Append the traces selected to the existing file (in case a trace was already exported, a
copy of the same traces is appended to the others)
• Abort: Do not save the new file.
Once created, the traces stored in the file can be loaded again by the traces viewer function of ToolsTalk
BLM, by selecting the Tools → Offline traces → Export traces menu:

NOTE: When the Real Time Traces function is started, it is not possible to use the other
functions of ToolsTalk BLM. To go back to ToolsTalk BLM, close all of the windows opened
by the Real Time Traces and exit the Pset execution menu on the STanalyser.

WARNING: The Real Time Traces function implies a certain use of the device and network
resources. Observe the following rules to obtain a better working of the function:
- After each set of 30 traces, the Real Time Trace opens a new window. Do not leave open more
than 4 windows.
- Set the sampling frequency between 100 Hz and 250 Hz.
- Wait until all the traces and values are loaded into the Real Time Trace window before starting
a new tightening.
- Keep the length of the tightening below 30 seconds.
- The PC should have these minimum requirements: Intel Core2 Duo 2.66 GHz or AMD Athlon
X2 6000 3 GHz, with 4 GB RAM.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 301 (383)


Real Time Traces STanalyser User Guide

15.1 Enabling and Setting the Real Time Traces


Function
The Real Time Traces function must be enabled and configured.

Select the Tools → Real time traces settings:

The following window is shown:

Global settings

STanalyser settings

302 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Real Time Traces

The settings are divided in two groups:

• Global Settings: Settings applied for all the STanalyser connected to the PC where ToolsTalk
BLM is installed
• Device Settings: Settings stored only on the STanalyser connected when these settings are
performed. The Device Settings are enabled only if a STanalyser is connected to
the PC.

View maximized If enabled, the real time traces window is shown in full screen.

Draw limits Select if drawing the target values and limits for the various traces.

Enable Activate the Real Time Traces function.

Sampling frequency The sampling frequency defined how many samples per seconds are provided
in the traces.
It can be set from 25Hz to 500Hz. The 100 Hz value is recommended.

Connection type Select the between USB or IRC-W.


IRC-W can be used only via API. See the Using the Real Time Traces with
IRC-W chapter for details.

Advanced settings In the Advanced settings menu is possible to select which traces
enable/disable for each tightening strategy:

Select the traces to be shown for each tightening strategy and click on OK to
save.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 303 (383)


Real Time Traces STanalyser User Guide

After performing the settings, click on Store to save:

NOTE: For “only angle” test strategy, the angle performed during the test must be limited to the
maximum value of 3200 degrees.

304 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16 Working with Torque Supervisor

Minimum version of Torque Supervisor required: 4.10

STanalyser types supported: Tool Crib T, Tool Crib T/A, Residual, AA

When the STanalyser is used with Torque Supervisor, one route of tests can be created and transferred to
the STanalyser by Torque Supervisor. The STanalyser only executes the tests and Torque Supervisor
downloads then the test results.

In this application the tests results are expected to be retrieved by Torque Supervisor. However, it is still
possible to review the results with ToolsTalk BLM (before transferring them from Torque Supervisor). In

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 305 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

any case, the Pset should be not modified with ToolsTalk BLM when the STanalyser is used with Torque
Supervisor.

NOTE: When the STanalyser gets programmed by Torque Supervisor, all of the Pset and Tools,
results and traces stored in the STanalyser memory are deleted. Connect the STanalyser to
ToolsTalk BLM and save tightening programs (in the .sta file) and results/traces if you wish to
keep a backup.

NOTE: In this application, the ToolsTalk BLM can be optional. However, not purchasing it, the
user cannot to access all of the STanalyser settings defined trough ToolsTalk BLM.

306 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

The operation flow is the following:

In Torque Supervisor, create the tools and/or tools linked to joints (operations), and enable the tool
tests and/or process control test.
Create a test route for the STanalyser. Define STanalyser and make settings.
***refer to the Torque Supervisor User Guide for details***

Connect STanalyser with PC with Torque Supervisor. Ensure that you are connecting a
STanalyser matching the serial number specified in Torque Supervisor.

From Torque Supervisor, program the STanalyser with the route of tests.

***Note: This operation will delete all tightening programs and results from STanalyser memory***

Disconnect the STanalyser from the PC.


Execute tests with STanalyser. The test execution changes between STanalyser Tool Crib,
STanalyser Residual and STanalyser AA; see the next paragraphs for details.

Connect again STanalyser to the PC.

From Torque Supervisor, retrieve tests results from STanalyser.

***Note: This operation will delete from the STanalyser memory all the results stored***

View results and reports in the statistics inside the


Statistics of Torque Supervisor.

Some STanalyser settings for this mode are defined into the Torque Supervisor settings. Please refer to the
Torque Supervisor User Guide for a full description of the settings and the details of the operations
required for this operation mode. To connect to Torque Supervisor trough the network, the ToolsTalk
BLM is necessary to set the IP address of the STanalyser (see the chapter Connecting to the STanalyser
for details).

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 307 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STwrench User Guide

16.1 Connecting the STanalyser to Torque Supervisor

The STanalyser can be connected to Torque Supervisor via USB, network or IRC-W radio module.
For USB connection, the STanalyser does not need any special settings.
For Network connection, the STanalyser network parameters must be configured. Select Tools → List
available STanalyser devices:

The following window is shown:

Double-click on one STanalyser or click on New device and configure the network parameters (if the
window above is empty click first on New or Open to create/open a file):

308 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STwrench User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

For IRC-W Dual Band radio module connection, the radio module must be properly configured; Connect
the STanalyser via USB to ToolsTalk BLM. Access the Controller → IRC-W API settings menu:

IRC-W settings for API


connection

To configure the module, ensure that connection is disabled:

Connection disabled

Then select the IRC-W API settings menu:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 309 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STwrench User Guide

• SSID: Enter the SSID name of your own wireless network.


• IRC-W mode: Select Access Point.
• Host name: Specify a name of the STanalyser.
• IP Address: Not used.
• Port: Not used.
• Keep alive timeout: Interval between keep alive messages from the STanalyser; the default value
(5 seconds) is recommended.
• Security Type: Select the same security type as your own wireless network.
• Internet Protocol (TCP/IP): Select Static IP, enable the TCP listener, and set the port as in
Torque Supervisor (default value 11000). Enable the Device IP Config (which assigns an IP
address to the STanalyser), and set the network parameters. The IP address must match the value
specified in Torque Supervisor.

The Advanced settings... allow you to set the band, channels and parameters for the IRC-W dual band
radio module. Set the following parameters according to your specific radio network and access point:

310 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STwrench User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

Regulatory
domains

Channels

Select one of the option for the 2.4 GHz and/or one or more options for the
Regulatory domain
5GHz.

Once the regulatory domain has been chosen, click on Selected Channels to
view/change the channels selected by default:

Channels

The channels available depend from the regulatory domain selected. Select the
channel(s) and click on OK to confirm.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 311 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STwrench User Guide

Select the data rate. A slower value may help when the communication is not
Data rate
high-performance.

Power mode The Sleep mode is recommended for lower power consumption.

Select the threshold under which the STanalyser will search for a new access
Roaming threshold
point to connect through.

Once all of the settings are done, enable the connection to API and click on Store to save:

Enable connection

Click on Store

312 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16.2 Test Execution with STanalyser Tool Crib


Once the route is programmed by Torque Supervisor, the STanalyser is automatically set for having the
Route menu enabled (and the Tools menu disabled) in the main menu:

Select Route to enter the route menu:

List of tools belonging


to the route.

NOTE: If the route is “forced”, this window is not shown and the test of the tools is started
automatically, in the order specified in Torque Supervisor.

Select one tool and click on OK on the STanalyser keyboard. A window with the associated Pset is shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 313 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

Click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to start the test on the tool. The test execution window
is the same of the one for testing a tool when not using the Route mode:

The number of tests to


This figure shows the be executed, and the
tests execution for Tool selection between
Crib T/A version. The Statistic Control or Cm-
Tool Crib T will perform Cmk test is defined into
the test in the same way, Torque Supervisor.
but showing statistics
instead of the angle.

NOTE: If this window is exit before the batch is completed, all the partial results are not saved
and not exported back to Torque Supervisor, and the whole batch must be started again
(however, if retrieving the result with ToolsTalk BLM all of them are present).

After each set of tests for the various tools composing the route is completed, the Route window is
updated:

- V: test completed with Number of tools tested


OK result with OK result.
- X: test completed with
Not OK result

Number of tools tested


over the total number of
tools composing the
route.

Once all the tools are tested, the message “Route Completed” is shown:

Once the route is completed, test results can be downloaded from the STanalyser to Torque Supervisor.

314 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16.2.1 Route of Statistic Control tests

When in Torque Supervisor the test type of the route is set to Statistic Control, at the end of the test on
each tool the result of the test is shown (if the “show test summary” option is not disabled in Torque
Supervisor):

Corrective action

Test OK Test Not OK

In case of Not OK result, the STanalyser shows the corrective action to be taken to fix the tool.
To exit this menu and continue to execute the route, click on the CL button on the STanalyser keyboard
To see the details of the result, click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard:

- OK: The test passed the constrains


given by the rule.
- NOK: The test did not passed the
constrains given by the rule.
- N.A.: Rule not applicable or disabled
inside Torque Supervisor.

Click on the CL button on the STanalyser keyboard to go back to the previous window.

There are seven rules to determine if the test result is OK or Not OK. Each rule can be enabled or disabled
inside Torque Supervisor (refer to the Torque Supervisor User Guide for details).

The following table shows the cross reference between the Rules shown on the STanalyser and the rules of
Torque Supervisor:

STanalyser rule Torque Supervisor rule


Rule 1 Verify whether the last average is outside the control limits
Verify whether the last 4 averages are outside from 1/3 of the control
Rule 2
limits
Rule 3 Verify whether the last 7 averages are over or under the average
Rule 4 Verify whether the last 7 averages are increasing or decreasing
Rule 5 Verify whether the last 2 averages are outside of the warning limits

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 315 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

Rule 6 Verify whether the dispersion is too large


Rule 7 Verify whether there is a value outside the tolerance limits

NOTE: Rules number 2, 3, 4 and 5 can be verified only if there are enough previous test results
stored in the memory. If Torque Supervisor stores previous test results for a tool, it sends the
last six averages to the STanalyser, and thus the first test with the STanalyser (which will be the
seventh) is used to verify the tool compliance also with the rules requiring seven averages.

The following table summarises the possible results:

TOOL
ICON DIAGNOSIS FURTHER ACTION
USABILITY

No icon Can be used The tool works properly. None

The mean is higher than the upper control


Calibrate, reducing
Can be used limit, but does not exceed the upper
the torque.
tolerance limit.

The mean is lower than the lower control Calibrate,


Can be used limit, but does not fall below the lower increasing the
tolerance limit. torque

Excessive dispersion of the values prevents


proper calibration of the tool, but the
Can be used Repair.
measured values are still within the tolerance
limits.

Remove the tool


CANNOT At least one value is higher than the from the line and
be used tolerance limit. calibrate, reducing
the torque.

316 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

Remove the tool


CANNOT At least one value is lower than the tolerance from the line and
be used limit. calibrate, increasing
the torque

Some measured values are outside the


Remove the tool
CANNOT tolerance limits. Excessive dispersion of the
from the line and
be used values PREVENTS proper calibration of the
repair.
tool.

The test limits are shown in the next figure:

Upper limit

Upper control limit


Upper warning limit
Target (nominal)
Lower warning limit Test limits
Lower control limit

Lower limit

Some of the rules are applied to the set of tests performed in a single statistic control test:

• Average out of the control limits:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 317 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

• Dispersion is too large:

Dispersion is considered too big when greater that the Range.

• At least one value out of the tolerance limits:

318 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

The following rules are applied to the last averages of the set of tests performed in consequential statistic
control tests. The STanalyser stores the last seven set of tests to analyse the trend according with the
following rules (note than when the tests result are retrieved by Torque Supervisor get deleted from the
STanalyser):

• Last 7 averages over or under the nominal value:

• Last 7 averages increasing or decreasing:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 319 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

• Last 2 averages out of the warning limits:

• Last 4 averages out of 1/3 of the control limits:

320 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16.2.2 Route of Cm-Cmk tests

When in Torque Supervisor the test type of the route is set to Cm-Cmk, at the end of the test on each tool
the result of the test is shown (if the “show test summary” option is not disabled in Torque Supervisor):

Select Torque or Angle and click on the OK button on the STanalyser keyboard to view the details of the
Cm-Cmk test:

The OK result is achieved if the Cm and Cmk shown here are greater than the minimum values specified
inside Torque Supervisor. The minimum value of Cm and Cmk for a OK test are those values defined
inside Torque Supervisor.

16.2.3 Exit and reset a route

It is possible to exit the route menu and continue the route execution at a later time.

Click on the CL button on the STanalyser keyboard to exit the route window. The following window is
shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 321 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

Exit Exit the route to continue it at a later time.

Exit and reset Exit the route and reset all the results.
NOTE: Selecting this command, the route is reset! When entering the route menu
again, the status and counters are reset:

Status reset

Counter reset

However, the tests completed before the reset are still present in the STanalyser
memory, and they are retrieved by Torque Supervisor when the data get
downloaded.

Bypass This is displayed only for “forced” routes. It allows the operator to skip a test (a
whole Cm-Cmk or Statistic Control set of tests) and proceed with the next one.
The skipped tests are marked as Not OK.

Back Go back to the route menu.

16.2.4 Route options

From the Torque Supervisor it is possible to set some options for the route. See the next paragraphs for the
details of these options, and refer to the Torque Supervisor User Guide for about how to configure a route
and its options.

322 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16.2.4.1 Result confirmation and result summary

The settings “Result confirmation option” and “Batches confirmation option”, normally set by the
ToolsTalk BLM, are set from Torque Supervisor for each route of test.
Regarding these two options, the behavior of the STanalyser is the same as for normal operations without
Torque Supervisor; refer to the STanalyser Tool Crib controller setup chapter for details.

For the use with Torque Supervisor, it is recommended to set the “Batches confirmation option” to
“Always” or “Only after NOK”, otherwise, at the end of a Cm-Cmk or Statistic Control test, the
STanalyser does not show the detailed result on the display.

NOTE: The settings of these two parameters override those set by ToolsTalk BLM. Therefore,
if the STanalyser is used as a stand-alone instrument after the use with Torque Supervisor, these
two options should be set again as preferred by ToolsTalk BLM.

16.2.4.2 “Free” and “Forced” routes

The route can be set by Torque Supervisor as free or forced.

In a free route, the order of the tools to be tested is a choice of the operator at the time of the test:

The tool is chosen


by the operator.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 323 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

In a forced route, the test is started automatically on the tools. The order is defined in Torque Supervisor:

The test on the first tool


is started automatically

16.2.4.3 Route execution mode

The execution mode of a route (set by Torque Supervisor) specifies if the tools composing the route can be
tested only one time or more than one time.
If the “Route execution mode” is set to “Multiple tests”, is it possible to repeat the test on a tool already
tested; if it is set to “Unique tests”, the test on a tool can be executed only once.

Moreover, it is possible to set the “Route execution mode” to “Hide tests after execution”; in this mode,
after the test on a tool, the tool is hidden, and only the not tested tools are shown on the route menu. This
mode can be useful to guide the operator to execute only once all of the tests, in the order chosen by the
operator himself.

NOTE: The “Route execution mode” does not have any effects for “forced” routes.

16.2.4.4 Route lock

This option (set by Torque Supervisor) defines if the route, once completed, can be executed again or not.
If the “Route lock mode” is set to “Don’t lock when the route is completed”, the route can be executed
again; if set to “Lock when the route is completed”, the route cannot be executed again (the message
“Route Locked” is shown if trying to start again the test).

NOTE: The “Route lock mode” does not have any effects for “forced” routes. A forced route
cannot be executed again anyway (unless the route gets reset by the “Exit and reset” command

324 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

by the STanalyser).

16.2.4.5 Timeout

When the STanalyser is used programmed by the ToolsTalk BLM, each Pset can have a different value for
the “End cycle time” (see the chapter Pset for details).
When the STanalyser is programmed with a route from Torque Supervisor, the “end cycle time” is a
general route option, which is defined inside Torque Supervisor; that value is used as timeout for all of the
tests composing the route.

16.2.5 Test strategies and parameters

Torque Supervisor (TS) defines the Pset parameters. The following tables summarize how the Pset
parameters of the STanalyser described in this user guide are set in the route created by Torque
Supervisor.

For STanalyser Tool Crib:

STanalyser Tool Crib


Setting
Pset parameters
Transducer required Disabled.

Control strategy - Generic power tool, 2 speed power tool, quick step: Power tool
- Impulses power tool, impulse tool shutoff: Pulse tool
- Dial wrench: Peak
- Click wrench: Click wrench

Check type - Test method in TS is set to Torque: Only torque


- Test method in TS is set to Angle: Only angle

Cycle Start Automatically set to the minimum load of the transducer connected to
the STanalyser.

Start final angle - Tools: Tool threshold


- Tools linked to operations: Operation threshold

Minimum torque - Tools: Tool minimum torque


- Tools linked to operations: Operation minimum torque

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 325 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

Maximum torque - Tools: Tool maximum torque


- Tools linked to operations: Operation maximum torque

Unit of measurement Unit of measurement

Minimum Cm (torque) Minimum Cm defined into TS system settings

Minimum Cmk (torque) Minimum Cmk defined into TS system settings

% first threshold - Generic power tool, 2 speed power tool, quick step: 50
- Click wrench: 5

% second threshold - Generic power tool, 2 speed power tool, quick step: 50
- Click wrench: 50
- Impulse power tool, impulse shutoff tool: 80

Torque coefficient Coefficient set in TS for the tool

Minimum angle - Tools: Tool minimum angle


- Tools linked to operations: Operation minimum angle

Maximum angle - Tools: Tool maximum angle


- Tools linked to operations: Operation maximum angle

Minimum Cm (angle) Minimum Cm defined into TS settings

Minimum Cmk (angle) Minimum Cmk defined into TS settings

End cycle time End cycle time (defined in the Route of TS)

Batch step Enabled

Batch count - Statistic Control test: Number of test (defined in the tool inside TS)
- Cm-Cmk test: Number of tests specified in TS system settings

Minimum pulse frequency 0

Maximum pulse frequency 255

Filter frequency Filter frequency defined into TS.

Peak - Click wrench: Peak click

326 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

Tool tightening direction - Tools: Tool tightening direction


- Tools linked to operations: Operation tightening direction

16.3 Test Execution with STanalyser Residual

Once the STanalyser is programmed by Torque Supervisor, the list of Psets to test the joints is available in
the Prog. Mode menu:

Execute the tests and then download the results from Torque Supervisor. Partial results are downloaded
anyway from the STanalyser memory (in that case the statistics are generated only when the remaining
test results are executed and downloaded).

16.3.1 Test strategies and parameters

Torque Supervisor (TS) defines the Pset parameters. The following tables summarize how the Pset
parameters of the STanalyser described in this user guide are set in the route created by Torque
Supervisor.

For STanalyser Residual:

Torque Supervisor STanalyser Residual


Breakaway peak Residual torque peak
*see formula below Cycle Start
Minimum torque Final Torque Min
Maximum torque Final Torque Max
**see formula below Change Screw
Threshold Start final angle

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 327 (383)


Working with Torque Supervisor STanalyser User Guide

0 Target angle

Breakaway time Residual torque time


*see formula below Cycle Start
Minimum torque Final Torque Min
Maximum torque Final Torque Max
**see formula below Change Screw
Threshold Start final angle
Analysis Limits (Lower – Higher) -Not used-

Breakaway angle Residual torque peak


*see formula below Cycle Start
Minimum torque Final Torque Min
Maximum torque Final Torque Max
**see formula below Change Screw
Threshold Start final angle
Breakaway torque – degrees Target angle

Loose and tighten Loose and tightening


*see formula below Cycle Start
Minimum torque Final Torque Min
Maximum torque Final Torque Max
**see formula below Change Screw
Nominal angle Start final angle

Breakaway (Tq/Angle) Residual torque angle


*see formula below Cycle Start
Minimum torque Final Torque Min
Maximum torque Final Torque Max
**see formula below Change Screw
Threshold Start final angle
Analysis Limits (Lower – Higher) -Not used-

For all the strategies:

* Cycle Start = 0 (the STanalyser sets automatically the Cycle Start to the minimum load of the
transducer connected.

** Change Screw = 1.2 × MaximumTorque

328 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with Torque Supervisor

16.4 Test Execution with STanalyser AA

The STanalyser AA features both the tests on tools performed by the STanalyser Tool Crib and the test on
joints performed by the STanalyser Residual.
Once the route is programmed by Torque Supervisor, the STanalyser is automatically set for having the
Route menu enabled (and the Tools menu disabled) in the main menu:

The Route menu contains the routes of test for tools created by Torque Supervisor. The route execution is
the same of the one for the Tool Crib version, described before in this chapter. See for Test Execution with
STanalyser Tool Crib details.

The tests belonging to route for residual torque check on joints are available in the Residual Check menu:

The route execution is the same of the one for the Residual version, described before in this chapter. See
for Test Execution with STanalyser Residual details.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 329 (383)


Working with ToolsNet STanalyser User Guide

17 Working with ToolsNet

NOTE: This chapter is not applicable to the STanalyser without RBU.

ToolsNet is a part of the ATS (Assembly Tools Software), which can work together with STanalyser to
complete the tightening process.
ToolsNet works together with the controllers and the selected database, Microsoft Sequel Server or
Oracle, to collect, store and display all historic tightening-related data. ToolsNet allows the user to obtain
reports on shifts, lines, individual vehicles or controllers for process improvement purposes. All reports
can easily be exported to Excel.
ToolsNet can be used as a standalone product or together with other modules from the ATS. ToolsNet as a
standalone product features:

• Tightening data collection and storage in a standard database management system (ORACLE or
MS SQL Server).

• Web-based reporting interface with standard reports, statistical information and graphs.

• Process improvement through extensive statistical process control function.

• Full traceability of every tightening performed with a connected controller.

ToolsNet with Factory Overview:

• All the functions of the standalone product.

• Factory Overview integrated with ToolsNet - Right-click in Factory Overview to get web reports
from ToolsNet.

ToolsNet with Event Monitor:

• All functions of the standalone product.

• Event history in ToolsNet reports.

330 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsNet

USB or Network

IRC-W

Access point

Network

The STanalyser communicates with ToolsNet via IRC-W connection. Therefore, install first the IRC-W
module in the STanalyser (see the IRC-W radio module chapter for installation details).

Tightening programs are created and transferred to the wrench by ToolsTalk BLM, and the results are sent
to the ToolsNet station in real time.
If the connection goes down, the wrench stores the tightening results; they are all transferred to ToolsNet
as soon as the connection is active again; if the maximum number of traces is reached while the
STanalyser is offline, a warning message alert the user that ,if continuing, the new traces overwrite the
oldest traces stored.

When the connection is active, the IRC-W symbol becomes active on the STanalyser display. During the
initialization process, the IRC-W icon is shown gradually:

When the connection is fully established, the whole logo is displayed:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 331 (383)


Working with ToolsNet STanalyser User Guide

17.1 Setting Communication between STanalyser and


ToolsNet
In order to set the IRC-W module properly, the following parameters of your own wireless network must
be configured:

• Name (SSID): Name of the wireless network.


• Security Options: The STanalyser IRC-W module supports the following security options:
- Disable (None)
- WEP 64
- WEP 128
- WPA - TKIP
- WPA2 - AES
- LEAP - WPA2
- LEAP - WEP 128
- WEP 64 (open connection)
- WEP 128 (open connection)
- PEAP -WPA2-AES
- PEAP -WPA-TKIP

• Security Options Password: Password for wireless network. For WEP 64 and WEP 128 it is
possible to choose between hexadecimal or ACII password:

Connect the STanalyser to ToolsTalk BLM and select the Controller → ToolsNet menu:

332 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsNet

In the ToolsNet settings window, select Connection:

- Check that the ToolsNet connection enabled is not selected


- If the flag is enabled, disable it and click on Store

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 333 (383)


Working with ToolsNet STanalyser User Guide

Select IRC-W → General Settings and set as follow:

• SSID: Set this as the SSID name of your own wireless network
• IRC-W mode: Select Access Point
• Host name: Specify a name of the wrench; if you have more than one wrench the names must be
different
• Keep alive timeout: Interval between keep alive messages from the wrench; a value of 5 seconds
is recommended
• IP Address: Specify the IP address of the PIM server (part of the ToolsNet configuration)
• port: Specify the port number of the PIM server (part of the ToolsNet configuration)
• Security Type: Select the same security type as your own wireless network
• Internet Protocol (TCP/IP): Select Enabled DHCP if your network uses the DHCP protocol
(and specify the DNS 1 and DNS 2 if they are not set automatically by the network). It is also
possible to assign an IP address (with Sub mask and Gateway) to the STanalyser, by selecting the
IP Config.

The Advanced settings... sets the band and channels for the IRC-W dual band radio module:

334 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsNet

Selecting one of the available options. The first four (world, FCC, ETSI,
Regulatory domain TELEC) can select only the 2.4 GHz channels, while the others can select also
the 5 GHz.
Leave to automatic or specify a channel. The channels available here are
Channels
depending from the Regulatory domain selected.

Select the data rate. A slower value may help when the communication has not
Data rate
high performances.

Power mode The Sleep mode is recommended for lower power consumption.

Select the threshold under where the STanalyser searches a new access point to
Roaming threshold
connect.

Select ToolsNet → Settings and set as follow:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 335 (383)


Working with ToolsNet STanalyser User Guide

Select OP Undefined as System type code.


The Station name identifies the tree structure which is shown in ToolsNet.
The Station number is associated with the tightening results; if more devices (STanalyser and other
instruments) are connected to ToolsNet, the Station Number must be unique.

If the Enable traces to ToolsNet is checked the tightening traces are sent to ToolsNet 4000; this option is
not available for Tool Crib.

Finally, select the Connection menu and set it as follows:

- Activate ToolsNet connection enabled


- Click on Store

NOTE: If disabling the ToolsNet connection, all of the results possibly stored in the STanalyser
memory and not already sent to ToolsNet are not transferred to ToolsNet any longer, even if the
connection is enabled again at a later time. For this reason, pay attention to not disabling the
ToolsNet connection before all of the results are transferred to ToolsNet (for instance, after
executing tests with the STanalyser temporary offline from ToolsNet).

This is what is shown on ToolsNet:

336 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with ToolsNet

The tightening results are displayed as following:

System Name, Station Number and


Spindle Number Results

By double-clicking on a single result, a window with more detailed information is shown.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 337 (383)


Working with ToolsNet STanalyser User Guide

On ToolsNet 4000 the results are presented like this:

338 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Statistics formulas

18 Statistics Formulas

Here are the formulas used by STanalyser to calculate the statistic results.
n

∑X i
Mean value (average): X= i =1

1  n 2  2
Standard deviation: σ=  ∑ Χ i  − n Χ 
n − 1  i =1  

Minimum value (Min): min = min( X i ) , 1 ≤ i ≤ n

Maximum value (Max): max = max( X i ) , 1 ≤ i ≤ n

X max l − X min l
Cm: Cm =

X − X X − X min l 
Cmk: C mk = min  max l , 
 3σ 3σ 

Where Xminl and Xmaxl are the test limits specified in the Pset.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 339 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

19 Working with the API


NOTE: To use the API interface, the STanalyser must be equipped with a RBU supporting the
API. See the chapter RBU for details of the different RBU available.

Network IRC-W

Network

340 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with API

The API, Application Programmers Interface, is an interface to the STanalyser that makes it possible to
access data in the STanalyser units from custom made applications.
This chapter gives an overview of the API functionality; for details of the API operations refer to the
STanalyser API Technical Documentation included in the API installation CD.
The STanalyser API is a software library that serves as the interface between the custom application and
the actual STanalyser units. This means that it exports a number of objects and methods that the custom
application can access in order to manipulate the STanalyser units.

Any PC
Custom Application

File System
COM or .NET interface

STanalyser Oracle Database


API Set Pset
STanalyser settings
...

Excel
GetTighteningResults

MS Access

USB or IRC-W (trough ”access point”)

STanalyser

Examples on what a client can do using the STanalyser API are:


• Upload and download configuration data from/to a STanalyser unit
• Read tightening results and traces from a STanalyser unit
• Get/Set the selected Pset, selected Job, barcode on a STanalyser unit
• Get/Set the batch count for a specific Pset on a STanalyser unit

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 341 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

NOTE: The STanalyser events (new result, new batch result, new job result, TAG removed,
TAG inserted, new identifier read, OK key pressed, CL key pressed, UP key pressed, DOWN
key pressed, LASER key pressed, OK key released, CL key released, UP key released, DOWN
key released, LASER key released, Battery low, Pset started, Pset completed, Cycle start
reached, Job started, job completed, multistage started, multistage completed) are available only
for connection via IRC-W (not for USB connection). Therefore, since events are available only
with IRC-W, the function to execute a Pset/Multistage/Job by the API should be used only with
IRC-W connection. To select a Pset/Multistage/Job the STanalyser “source program” must be
set to API. See the chapter Setting the source for Pset/Multistage/Job selection for details.

The STanalyser API handles all communication needed between the PC, on which the custom application
resides, and the specific STanalyser units involved. The developer of the custom application only needs
to know which objects and function(s) to call, and in some cases how the returned data is formatted.
When the custom application invokes one of the API functions the API first translates the request to
commands understood by the target unit. These are then sent to the target Unit via the USB connection.
Thereafter the API waits for the answer to be returned. When the answer is received it is interpreted and in
some cases translated to a more easily understood format before the API returns the answer to the custom
application.
Custom applications using the API can be run on any PC that is connected to a STanalyser via USB or
Ethernet. However, only one custom application may use the API on a specific PC at the time.
Technically the STanalyser API can be used with a COM interface or a .NET interface.
Before using the STanalyser API you must install the component on the PC you are going to use it from. It
also installs a small custom application example, written in Visual Basic 6 and Visual Basic .NET, that
shows you how an example on how the API can be used.
After installing the STanalyser API you can start to develop applications performing tasks not covered by
the standard STanalyser system. Typical cases are:
• Storing cycle data on disk, or in a data base, in any customer specific format
• Sending cycle data to an external SPC program
• Sending or receiving data via any serial protocol you choose to implement
• Backing up setups on a central server

342 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

19.1 API Connection with IRC-W

The STanalyser and API can be connected trough IRC-W. The IRC-W module must be installed in the
STanalyser (see the chapter IRC-W radio module for details).
The IRC-W module must be properly configured; the configuration can be done directly from the API
(connecting the STanalyser with USB cable). However, also the ToolsTalk BLM can perform the module
settings in a dedicated menu. Access the Controller → IRC-W API settings menu:

IRC-W settings for API


connection

To configure the module, ensure that connection is disabled:

Connection disabled

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 343 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

Select then the IRC-W API settings menu:

• SSID: Set this as the SSID name of your own wireless network.
• IRC-W mode: Select Access Point.
• Host name: Specify a name of the STanalyser; if you have more than one STanalyser the names
must be different.
• IP Address: Specify the IP address of the PC where API is installed (not used if TCP listener is
enabled).
• Port: Specify the port number of the PC where the API is installed (not used if TCP listener is
enabled).
• Keep alive timeout: Interval between keep alive messages from the STanalyser; a value of 5
seconds is recommended.
• Security Type: select the same security type as your own wireless network.
• Internet Protocol (TCP/IP): Select Enabled DHCP is your network uses the DHCP protocol
(and specify the DNS 1 and DNS 2 if they are not set automatically by the network). It is also
possible to assign manually an IP address (with Sub mask and Gateway) to the STanalyser, by
selecting Static IP, and configuring then the Device IP Config:

344 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

For IRC-W Dual Band radio module, if the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is set to Static IP, it
is possible to enable the TCP Listener (and port); in this mode the STanalyser serves as
listener instead of sender, and vice versa the API serves as sender instead of listener;
therefore only one STanalyser can interface with the API:

If the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is set to Static IP and DHCP server, the STanalyser
works as DHCP server, which means that which means that the STanalyser assigns an IP
address to the system connecting to it:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 345 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

The Advanced settings... sets the band and channels for the IRC-W dual band radio module:

Selecting one of the available options. The first four (world, FCC, ETSI,
Regulatory domain TELEC) can select only the 2.4 GHz channels, while the others can select also
the 5 GHz.
Leave to automatic or specify a channel. The channels available here are
Channels
depending from the Regulatory domain selected.

Select the data rate. A slower value may help when the communication has not
Data rate
high performances.

Power mode The Sleep mode is recommended for lower power consumption.

Select the threshold under where the STanalyser searches a new access point to
Roaming threshold
connect.

Once all of the settings are done, enable the connection to API and click on Store to save:

Enable connection

Click on Store

346 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

19.2 API Connection via Ethernet

The STanalyser and API can be connected via Ethernet.


The Ethernet parameters must be properly configured; the configuration can be done directly from the API
(connecting the STanalyser with USB cable). However, also the ToolsTalk BLM can perform the settings
in a dedicated menu. Access the Controller → Ethernet configuration menu:

Network parameters

Set the network parameters and click on Store.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 347 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

19.3 Using the Real Time Traces with IRC-W


If the STanalyser is equipped with RBU supporting the API interface, it is possible to configure and use
the Real Time Traces function via IRC-W.

First of all, install the API software. Refer to the STwrench-STanalyser – Introduction to API manual for
details of installation. Minimum API software version: 5.2.0

Install the IRC-W module on the STanalyser and configure the module using ToolsTalk BLM as follow:

- Disable the IRC-W connection and click on Store:

348 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

- Configure the network parameters:

Enable the TCP listener and configure all the network parameters.

- Enable the IRC-W connection and click on Store:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 349 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

Disconnect the STanalyser from ToolsTalk BLM.

Launch the STanalyser API application, available in the Start → Programs → BLM Atlas-Copco APIs →
Examples:

350 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

The following window is shown:

Enable the IRC-W (Sender), and click on Client settings. The following window is shown:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 351 (383)


Working with the API STanalyser User Guide

Set the network parameters according to those defined for the IRC-W module in ToolsTalk BLM as
described above. Enable the Auto reconnect to reconnect the STanalyser automatically in case of
communication temporary lost. Click OK to save.

Click on Connect and verify that the STanalyser is connected (the IRC-W logo is also shown on the
STanalyser display):

Connect

STanalyser
connected

352 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Working with the API

Select Other Function:

Enable the Active flag, set the Sampling frequency (100 Hz recommended value), click on Set and then
click on Get.
The Real Time Traces function is now active. Keep the API software application open and connected to
the STanalyser. Execute a tightening and the Real Time Traces window will be shown.
Refer to the Real Time Traces chapter for details of the Real Time Traces function.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 353 (383)


Maintenance STanalyser User Guide

20 Maintenance

20.1 Yearly Calibration

The STanalyser needs to be recalibrated every year. Contact the customer center for calibration.

20.2 STanalyser Cleaning


Keep the STanalyser clean.
After use, remove any traces of oil, grease and dust from the STanalyser, especially from the display, the
keyboard, and the mini USB port.
When the USB cable is not connected to the STanalyser, insert the plug to protect the port from the dust.
Keep always clean the connectors and the glass for the barcode reader module.
Avoid using harsh detergents to clean the STanalyser.

20.3 Battery Pack Maintenance

Avoid fully discharge the battery. During normal use, recharge the battery when it is low.
For long term storage (as in the case of spare batteries), cells should be kept within a range of a 30% ±
15% charge. Follow these rules:

• Store the battery in a dry place not exceeding 30° C


• Recharge the battery for one hour every six months

After long term storage, fully recharge the battery before use.

354 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix A – Calculating correction coefficients for MRTT-C extensions

21 Appendix A – Calculating Correction


Coefficients for MRTT-C Extensions
NOTE: This chapter is applicable only to the STanalyser Production, Residual and AA
versions.

When the joint design or space limitations preclude use of standard sockets or tools, it may be necessary to
use special extension spanners to fit the application.
In these cases the STanalyser measure must be adequately compensated because the factory calibration is
made for the standard arm (L) and the extension arm (E) increases the measured torque. The angle
measure is also affected by the extensions, due to its specific torsion when the torque is applied.

21.1 Torque Correction Coefficient

T = torque applied
D = torque displayed on STanalyser display
L = standard arm (measured at the center of the end fitting tool)
E = extension arm
L+E = total arm

D × (L + E )
From the relation between the displayed and applied torque T = , the torque correction
L
coefficient is given by the following formula:

L+ E
Torque correction coefficient =
L

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 355 (383)


Appendix A – Calculating correction coefficients for MRTT-C extensions STanalyser User Guide

21.2 Angle Correction Coefficient

When an extension is used, the angle correction coefficient (CCA) permits linear compensation of
extension torsion due to the torque applied. The value is expressed in degrees at the reference torque
(Torque nominal).

To calculate the proper angle correction coefficient, the torque coefficient of the extension must be already
calculated (as described above) and written in the RFID TAG of the end fitting tool:

Insert torque correction coefficient


and click on Set

Click to save

Enter the Free Mode → Peak mode:

STanalyser
Production

STanalyser
Residual

356 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix A – Calculating correction coefficients for MRTT-C extensions

Apply torque, closed to the nominal value of the MRTT-C, operating the MRTT-C on a static transducer:

Enter the values shown on the display and click on Set to save:

Enter the Torque and Angle values


shown on the STanalyser display.

Click to save

NOTE: After having stored the angle correction coefficient, in order to verify the correct
calculation of the angle coefficient, it is NOT possible to use the free mode, cause the free mode
does not consider the correction coefficients. Therefore, for a verification test a Pset should be
created.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 357 (383)


Appendix A – Calculating correction coefficients for MRTT-C extensions STanalyser User Guide

21.3 Correction Formulas

During the tightening, the torque and angle measured by the transducers are corrected to obtain the real
torque and angle values, which are displayed on the STanalyser and used in the tightening traces and
results. The correction formulas are:

Torque measured − Cycle Start


Angle displayed = Angle measured − Angle Coefficient ×
MRTTC capacity − Cycle Start

Torque displayed = Torque measured × Torque coefficient

358 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure

22 Appendix B - Firmware Upgrade Procedure

The firmware upgrade loads on the STanalyser a different firmware version.

The following table summarizes the firmware versions required by the different RBU:

Firmware Tool crib Production Residual AA


RBU
STanalyser without RBU X
Tool Crib T X
Tool Crib T/A X
Tool Crib T/A API X
Production X
Production API X
Residual X
Residual API X
AA X
AA API X

Firmware upgrade can be used to:

• Change the firmware required by a new RBU


• Upgrade the STanalyser to a newer version

NOTE: When upgrading the firmware to change RBU type, it is recommended to save the
Identifier configuration in a .sta file, to be re-imported after the firmware upgrade; Identifier
configuration might be erased otherwise.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 359 (383)


Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure STanalyser User Guide

22.1 New RBU installed in the STanalyser

When inserting a new RBU in the STanalyser, the following message is shown in case the present
firmware loaded in the STanalyser has to be upgraded:

In this case, connect the STanalyser to ToolsTalk BLM, which automatically shows this message:

Click on Yes to continue with the upgrade procedure explained in the paragraph 22.3 Upgrade procedure.

22.2 Upgrade the STanalyser to a newer version

ToolsTalk BLM contains already the latest set of files for the STanalyser; if a newer set of firmware file is
available to upgrade the STanalyser (which does not require a new version of ToolsTalk BLM), it can be
uploaded selecting the Tools → Import Firmware menu and import the new set of firmware (.fwc file):

360 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure

Select the Tools → Upgrade Firmware menu:

Proceed with the upgrade procedure explained in the next paragraph.

22.3 Upgrade procedure


When the upgrade procedure is launched the following window is shown. Follow the instructions and
click on Next:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 361 (383)


Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure STanalyser User Guide

During the procedure, the following popup window might be automatically shown on your PC; in that
case, close the popup window:

362 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure

In case of firmware upgrade launched automatically after a new RBU installation, the firmware file is
suggested automatically; in case of firmware upgrade to a newer version, select it based on the RBU type
currently installed in the STanalyser. It is possible to load one of the firmware available in the pre-defined
set, or loading an external file:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 363 (383)


Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure STanalyser User Guide

Select the file

File selected
Load an Drive selected
external file

Select the file and the driver (the driver for STanalyser is the same of the one for the STwrench), and click
on Next to continue. The following window is shown:

Keep pressed the ON button on the STanalyser display to complete the firmware upgrade.

364 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure

At the end of the procedure the following message confirms that the upgrade has been completed:

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 365 (383)


Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure STanalyser User Guide

Switch off the STanalyser, then switch it on again and check that it works properly, with the new
firmware installed:

Firmware
version

Power on screen Zero adjustment

WARNING: The procedure is not completed at this step. After the zero adjustment screen
shown in the figures above, the message “Update Dictionary” may be displayed. If so, proceed
with the Language Upload procedure explained below.

22.3.1 Language upload

1. Connect the STanalyser with the latest release of ToolsTalk BLM.


2. After click on the Connect icon, the following message is shown:

3. Click on Yes, and the following window is shown. Click on the arrow to start the update:

Click here Progress bar

4. Wait until the process is completed. At the end the following message is shown:

366 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix B – Firmware Upgrade Procedure

5. Disconnect the STanalyser from the PC.


6. Restart the STanalyser and verify that the unit is working properly.

22.3.2 Recovery procedure in case of problems during firmware


upgrade

If a problem occurs while copying the new firmware (i.e. the ON buttons is released before the end of
the copying process, or USB cable disconnected during the operation), the STanalyser display will
become black and the keyboard will not respond.

1. Disconnect USB cable.


2. Remove the battery from the STanalyser.
3. Reinstall the battery in the STanalyser.
4. Restart the upgrade procedure.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 367 (383)


Appendix C – STanalyser Factory Settings STanalyser User Guide

23 Appendix C - STanalyser Factory Settings

The STanalyser settings are stored into the RBU.


The following table details the RBU default configuration for the STanalyser Tool Crib (valid also for
STanalyser AA, for the parameters applicable to the AA version):

Name This field is left blank as factory settings.

Language English

Result confirmation option Never

Batch result summary Never

368 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix C – STanalyser Factory Settings

Test menu configuration Only tools.


Minimum torque, maximum torque, Average torque, Torque
Statistic options standard deviation.

Pulse option Frequency

The following table details the RBU default configuration for the STanalyser Production and Residual
(valid also for STanalyser AA, for the parameters applicable to the AA version):

Device Name This field is left blank as factory settings.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 369 (383)


Appendix C – STanalyser Factory Settings STanalyser User Guide

YES
Tag enabled

Device vibration YES

Vibrate on NOK results NO

Free Mode enabled YES

Menu settings enabled YES

Device light on YES

YES.
Note that it was set to NO for RBU produced before serial
Device sounds on number RBU P 01156, RBU Q 00170, RBU PA 0010, RBU QA
0016.

Job skip confirm availability NO

Group menu enabled YES

Batch increment condition OK

Automatic shutdown timeout 0 (no automatic shutdown)

General display timeout 1,5

Source program Keyboard

Sub source job Keyboard

370 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Appendix C – STanalyser Factory Settings

Device language English

Device date format European

Warning on buffer results full Disabled

For all the versions:

Result Fields Fields activated: Overall status, Torque result, Pset name

Disabled.
When enabled by the user, the following parameters are set by
default:
- Sampling option: 100 Hz
Real time traces - Connection type: USB
- View maximized: Disabled
- Advanced settings: Torque/time and angle/time traces
enabled in real time, torque/angle trace enabled in not real
time.

The radio module IRC-W is not set to a specific configuration by default; when installed, it must be set
anyway according to the specific customer environment.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 371 (383)


Troubleshooting Guide STanalyser User Guide

24 Troubleshooting Guide

Here is a quick troubleshooting guide for the STanalyser.

If a problem occurs, before taking any action (replacing parts or contacting customer support), be sure to
check that the STanalyser is being used properly; improper operation can cause defeats even if the system
is in good working order.
In case of issues, the log file can provide information about the problem; see STanalyser LOG Viewer and
Enabling LOG File.

Symptom Possible cause Solution

Cannot enter the test menu. - Transducer not connected or - Connect an ACTA transducer to the
not selected. STanalyser and ensure it is automatically
recognized. For non-ACTA transducers, ensure
to define them in the database and to have
selected one for the test.

Cannot connect the ToolsTalk - Wrong connection type - When clicking on the Connect icon, ensure
BLM to the STanalyser that the USB or Network is selected. Click on
the arrow on the right side of the icon to select
the connection method.

Test result is always Not OK - Ensure to use proper setup - Check and eventually modify the test setup
when testing a tool, or the parameters (the thresholds are the most critical
click-point of a wrench is parameters)
never detected.

The ACTA transducer is not - Wrong transducer type, or - Ensure that you are using an IRTT-B / IRTT
recognized by the STanalyser. transducer not properly or SRTT-B / SRTT or SRTT-L or QRTT-B
programmed properly programmed/calibrated

- Cable failure - Replace cable and check if the transducer gets


recognized.

The test cannot be executed - Transducer not selected - Access the transducer DB menu and select a
with non-ACTA transducer transducer.
- Transducer not configured - Access the transducer menu from ToolsTalk
BLM and check the transducer data.
- Cable failure - Replace cable and check if the transducer gets
recognized.

The STanalyser starts with a - RBU not properly installed - The STanalyser with RBU starts with a
wrong menu different menu compared to the one without
RBU; ensure proper RBU installation.

372 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Troubleshooting Guide

The angle measurements - No trigger is available on - Since there is no a “trigger” to synchronize


between the STanalyser and the STanalyser the angle measurement between the two
the tool controller are instruments, a difference in the angle result is
different, even if the normal.
parameters are set in the same
way.

A pop-up window is shown - Real Time Traces function - Disable the Real Time Traces function in the
by ToolsTalk BLM each time activated ToolsTalk BLM settings for STanalyser.
a Pset is started

“Capacity error” is shown on - The transducer has capacity - Use a transducer with higher capacity.
the STanalyser display when not adequate for the test.
starting a test - For non-ACTA transducer, check the
transducer data in the transducer database, and
check that the right transducer is selected for
the test.

“Check cycle start” is shown - Pset and transducer data not - Check both the transducer and the Pset data;
on the STanalyser display matching they must be compatible to start a test.
when starting a test

“Communication error” is - STanalyser and Power - Check the ACTA serial cable
shown on the STanalyser Focus / PowerMACS missing - Check that the STanalyser is properly
during Power Focus or installed on the docking station
PowerMACS calibration

“MRTT-C not calibrated” is - Cable failure - Check if the problem gets solved with a new
shown on the STanalyser cable between STanalyser and MRTT-C
display when connecting a
MRTT-C - MRTT-C failure - Check if the problem gets solved with a new
MRTT-C

If both cases are not applicable, the STanalyser


should be sent for repair.

“New Calibration Required” - Transducer calibration - Calibrate the transducer


is shown on the STanalyser expired
display when selecting a tool

“No Pset available” is shown - Tool has not Pset associated - Associate at least one Pset to the tool.
on the STanalyser display
when selecting a tool

“No more Psets available” is - Tool has been deleted - Exit the test menu, and create a tool with at
shown on the STanalyser least a linked Pset.
display when starting a test

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 373 (383)


Troubleshooting Guide STanalyser User Guide

“No tool” is shown on the - Tool not defined - Create at least a tool with a Pset associated to
STanalyser display when start a test.
accessing the Tools menu

“No transducer” is shown on - Transducer not defined - Create at least one transducer in the
the STanalyser display when transducers database
accessing the Transducer
menu

“Please connect to ToolsTalk - Wrong RBU installed in the - Check that a RBU for the STanalyser has been
BLM for firmware upgrade” unit (for example, RBU for installed.
is shown on the STanalyser STwrench)
display.

“Init failure” is shown on the - RBU cannot be initiated - Remove and install again the RBU.
STanalyser. - Replace RBU and check if the problem is
solved.

“Pset mismatch” is shown on - Pset parameters not coherent - Check and correct the Pset used for the test
the STanalyser during Power
Focus or PowerMACS
calibration

“Tool mismatch” is shown on - Tool serial number incorrect - Correct the serial number of the tool (by
the STanalyser during Power ToolsTalk BLM) matching the serial number
Focus or PowerMACS on the Power Focus / PowerMACS tool.
calibration

“Transducer not suitable for - Static transducer used for a - Connect a transducer with angle
angle testing” is shown on the test in angle measurement. For non-ACTA transducers,
STanalyser display. ensure to have set properly the parameters in
the transducer database, and to have selected it
for the test.

“Type unknown” is shown on - A not valid ACTA - Only IRTT-B (IRTT) or QRTT-B or SRTT-B
the STanalyser display. transducer has been (SRTT) or SRTT-L are supported. Do not
connected to the STanalyser connect different ACTA transducers.

“Update dictionary” is shown - The firmware has been - Perform the dictionary update procedure
on the STanalyser display at updated and the dictionary described in the Language upload chapter.
the power on must be updated.

“Zero error” is shown on the - smartHEAD (with angle - Switch off and on the STanalyser, leaving the
STanalyser display after reading) connected to MRTT- MRTT-C in a fixed position during power on.
power on. C was moved during power
on

374 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Troubleshooting Guide

- Torque applied during - Switch off and on the STanalyser, not


power on applying any torque during power on.

- Transducer yielded - Transducer yielded. A new transducer must be


used.

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 375 (383)


Abbreviations STanalyser User Guide

25 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

A Ampere ms millisecond

AA Advanced Analysis n Numbers (of values)

AC Alternating current N.A. Not Applicable

API Application Programmer Interface Nm Newton meter

ATS Assembly Tools Software Nr. Number

Avg Average OK Approved (test)

CCA Angle Correction Coefficient NOK Not approved (test)

CCW Counter clockwise PC Personal Computer

CL Clear (button) PF Power Focus

CW Clockwise PROG Program

dBm Decibel referred to milliwatt RBU Rapid Backup Unit

DC Direct current RF Radio Frequency

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility SRTT Stationary Reaction Torque Transducer

EMI Electromagnetic Interference SSID Service Set Identifier


Hertz (measurement unit of
Hz Std Standard deviation
frequency)
ID Identification SW Software

IP Internet Protocol TT BLM ToolsTalk BLM

IRC Industrial Radio Communication TS Torque Supervisor

IRDA Infrared Data Association USB Universal Serial Bus


Inline Rotary Torque/angle
IRTT V Volt
Transducer
LED Light-Emitting Diode VIN Vehicle Identification Number
Waste Electrical and Electronic
Max Maximum WEEE
Equipment
Min Minimum

376 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Troubleshooting Guide

26 Index
residual torque/angle; 239
residual torque/peak; 243
A residual torque/time; 235
Abbreviations; 368 Buzzer; 53
Alarm on rehit; 196 enabling STanalyser buzzer; 251
Angle correction coefficient; 349
correction formula; 351 C
setting the parameter from ToolsTalk BLM; 263
setting the parameter into Pset definition; 200 Caibration
Angle Peak; 196 Power Focus; 119
API; 333 Power MACS; 125
Applications (typical); 27 Calibration; 347
Assembling of STanalyser; 35 calibration certificate; 20
Automatic shutdown; 252 transducer calibration value; 260
CCW; 140
Change screw; 196
B Check already tightened angle; 197
Barcode. See also Identifier Click wrench
enabling barcode reading before starting a Job; test setup; 160
207 testing a click wrench; 157
enabling barcode reading before starting a Clockwise; 200
Multistage; 205 tightening direction display icon; 210
enabling barcode reading before starting a Pset; Configuration. See Settings
201 Connect
setting the barcode reading to activate a connection status; 63
Pset/Multistage/Job; 253 toolbar; 63
Barcode reader; 40 Connector; 50
installation; 40 Controller
specifications; 19 toolbar; 62
Batch; 139 Counterclockwise; 200
enable batch summary; 150 tightening direction display icon; 210
settings increment condition; 252 CW; 140
Batch count Cycle start; 135; 195
Multistage; 204
Pset; 199
Batch size
D
Multistage; 204 Date and time setup; 250
Pset; 199 STanalyser Tool Crib T; 145; 246
Battery; 42 STanalyser without RBU; 100
charge status information; 63 date format; 253
information; 13 Dimensions; 18
installation; 42 Direction
long term storage; 347 CW/CCW; 164; 171; 177; 185; 190
maintenance; 347 Direction (tightening); 140
recharging; 43 Disconnect
specification; 17 toolbar; 63
Battery charger; 42 Display; 52
specifications; 17 Docking station; 45
Breakaway
free test - residual torque/angle; 95
free test – residual torque/time; 94

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 377 (383)


Index STanalyser User Guide

prerequisite; 269
E printing identifier strings; 274
Edit result parts; 273
menu list; 61 significant string; 268
End cycle time; 198 type; 268
End time; 138 Illuminating light
Export enabling MRTT-C illuminating light; 251
create report; 284 IRC-W; 41
export a trace to image; 294 installation; 41
export the results to excel; 283 ToolsNet connection; 324
Export results; 283 IRTT-B; 76
External power supply; 44
specifications; 17
J
Job; 205
F associating identifier strings to Result part 1 of all
File the Pset composing the Job; 207
menu list; 61 deleting all the Jobs from RBU; 258
Filter frequency; 140; 163; 171; 177; 185; 189 enabling warning message for Job skip; 251
Final target (torque); 195 job summary; 210
Final torque max; 195 Job type (forced, free); 207
Final torque min; 195 repeat job; 207
Firmware upgrade; 352 reset strategy; 207
Firmware version; 87; 153; 255 result of non tightenings; 207
First menu; 101; 102 setting a barcode to activate a Job; 253
Free mode setting the sub source job; 253
enabling STanalyser free mode; 251 Joint analysis; 233
Free test; 89
peak; 92
residual Torque / Angle; 95
K
residual Torque / Time; 94 Keyboard; 53
speed; 96
tight Torque / Angle; 93
track; 91 L
Language; 149; 151; 152; 254
G settings the language for STanalyser tool Crib T;
144; 246
General display timeout; 252 Language upload; 359
Getting started with STanalyser; 86 LEDs; 51
settings; 255
Linearity check; 141
H Lock at batch done
Help Multistage; 204
toolbar; 63 Pset; 199
LOG file; 75
LOG viewer; 74
I Loose (tightening strategy); 231
Identifier; 267 Loose and retight (tightening strategy); 245
associating identifiers to tightening programs; 271
concepts; 268 M
configuring a work order; 272
configuring identifiers; 270 Maintenance; 347
examples; 276 Max angle; 196

378 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Troubleshooting Guide

Max coherent NOK results Production and Residual options; 200


Multistage; 204 Production and Residual timeout; 198
Pset; 199 Production and Residual torque parameters; 195
Measurement units; 164; 171; 177; 186; 190 Pset for Production and Residual; 193
Menu list; 61 pulse parameters; 139
Min angle; 196 setting the source program; 253
Min. Load; 261 tightening direction; 140
MRTT-B; 76 timeout parameters; 138
MRTT-C; 76 torque parameters; 134
Multistage; 201 Pulse target; 109; 115
deleting all the Multistages from RBU; 258 Pulse tools
setting the source program; 253 test setup; 181; 187
testing a pulse tool; 178
threshold; 186
N torque coefficient; 182
Network port; 54
Q
O QRTT-B; 76
Offline programming; 71
Open; 71
Overload; 101; 145; 247
R
Overview; 21; 36 Ratchet time; 198
STanalyser modules; 32 RBU; 37
installation; 38
RBU information; 255
P Real Time Traces; 297
Peak; 140; 172 settings; 301
test setup; 175 Residual; 191
Power Focus calibration; 119 Residual torque/angle
Power MACS calibration; 125 algorithm description; 240
Power on; 88 Residual torque/angle (tightening strategy); 239
Power tools Residual torque/peak (tightening strategy); 243
test setup; 167 Residual torque/time
Print algorithm description; 236
printing a trace; 294; 328; 339 Residual torque/time (tightening strategy); 235
printing identifier strings; 274 result confirmation option; 149
Production; 191 Result parts; 273
Prog Mode Results
enabling Pset/MS/Job grouping; 251 create report; 283
Pset; 131 erasing all of the results from the STanalyser
angle parameters; 137 memory; 155
associate a transducer to the Pset; 133 Results Viewer; 279
auto delete; 201 erasing all the results from the STanalyser
batch parameters; 139 memory; 258
control strategy; 133 toolbar; 62
deleting all the Psets from RBU; 258 Route; 306; 320; 322
erasing all the Pset from the RBU; 155 exit and reset; 314
linking a Pset to the tool; 109; 115 free and forced routes; 316
main parameters; 132 locked route; 317
options; 140 options; 315
Production and Residual angle parameters; 196 route of Cm-Cmk tests; 314
Production and Residual batch parameters; 199 route of statistic control tests; 308

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 379 (383)


Index STanalyser User Guide

test strategies and parameters; 318; 320 Specifications; 17


Barcode reader; 19
battery; 17
S battery charger; 17
Safety; 12 dimensions; 18
Save environmental; 19
save data from STanalyser; 65 external power supply; 17
save offline data to STanalyser; 73 interfaces; 19
Sensitivity; 260 System Requirements; 20
Serial number; 153; 255 technical; 17
Settings weight; 18
analyser name; 249 Speed; 96
automatic shutdown; 252 SRTT-B; 76
controller setup; 259 SRTT-L; 47; 76
date and time; 250 STanalyser AA; 265
date format; 253 STanalyser language; 253
enabling Pset/MS/Job grouping in Prog. Mode; 251 STanalyser map; 64
enabling warning message for Job skip; 251 toolbar; 63
erasing memory data; 257 STanalyser name; 148
free mode enabling; 251 STanalyser Production and Residual
general display timeout; 252 executing a test; 208
illuminating light; 251 settings; 246
LEDs; 255 tightening strategies; 211
real time traces; 301 STanalyser Tool Crib T
result confirmation option; 110; 116; 149 creating a Pset; 106; 112
source of Pset and Multistage; 253 creating a tool; 107; 113
STanalyser; 152 executing a test; 109
STanalyser date and time; 250 testing a tool; 106
STanalyser factory configuration; 361 STanalyser Tool Crib T; 105
STanalyser main menu configuration; 151 STanalyser Tool Crib T/A
STanalyser menu language setup; 99; 149; 253 executing a test; 115
STanalyser name; 148 testing a tool; 111
STanalyser Production and Residual controller STanalyser without RBU; 97
setup; 248 settings; 99
STanalyser Production and Residual settings; 246 test setup; 99
STanalyser without RBU; 99 testing a tool; 98
Tool Crib configuration; 148 Start final angle; 196
Tool Crib controller setup; 147 Statistic control
Tool Crib settings; 144 limits; 310
tool recognition; 250 results and corrective actions; 309
ToolsTalk BLM language setup; 65 rules; 308
traces settings; 154; 257 Statistics
vibration device; 250 formulas; 332
warning message for memory full; 151; 254 setting the statistics for STanalyser Tool Crib T;
Slip wrench 146
testing a slip wrench; 172 Status bar; 63
smartHEAD STwanalyser name; 249
calibration value; 260 Sub source job; 253
last calibration date; 261 System requirements; 20
min. load; 261
serial number; 260
Software. See ToolsTalk BLM
T
Software upgrade; 59 TAG writer; 262
Span; 260

380 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Troubleshooting Guide

torque and angle correction coefficients for end toolbar; 62


fitting tool; 263 Torque (tightening strategy); 214
Threshold; 136; 169 Torque + Angle (tightening strategy); 221
Tightening direction; 200 Torque coefficient; 136
Tightening strategies Torque correction coefficient
joint analysis; 233 calculating the coefficient; 348
loose; 231 correction formula; 351
loose and retight; 245 setting the parameter into End Fitting Tool; 263
residual torque/angle; 239 setting the parameter into Pset definition; 200
residual torque/peak; 243 Torque peak; 196
residual torque/time; 235 Torque Supervisor
torque; 214 test execution with STanalyser; 306; 320; 322
Torque (control) / Angle (control) AND; 225 working with Torque Supervisor; 304
Torque (control) / Angle (control) OR; 222 Traces
Torque (control) / Angle (monitor); 216 real time traces; 297
Torque (monitor) / Angle (control); 218 Traces viewer; 285
Yield point (production); 228 export a trace; 294
Tightening strategies for Production and Residual; 211 traces comparison; 291
Timeout; 168; 176; 182; 187; 189; 198 Traces Viewer
timeout for routes; 318 erasing all the traces from the STanalyser memory;
Tool 258
creating a tool; 107; 113 settings the maximum number and length of the
erasing all of the tools from the RBU; 155 saved traces; 154; 257
linking a Pset to the tool; 109; 115 show cursor; 289
menu list; 61 Transducer overload
testing a tool with STanalyser Tool Crib T; 106 STanalyser Production and Residual; 247
testing a tool with STanalyser Tool Crib T/A; 111 STanalyser Tool Crib T; 145
testing a tool with STanalyser without RBU; 98 STanalyser without RBU; 101
Tool Crib; 104 Transducers; 76
Tool Crib T; 105 ACTA transducers report; 84
Tool number; 204 associating a transducer to the Pset; 133
Tool recognition connecting a transducer to STanalyser; 77
enabling STanalyser tool recognition function; 250 connector for transducer; 50
setting a tool required for a Multistage; 204 deleting all the transducer from memory; 155
setting a tool required for a Pset; 200 information; 83
setting the automatic tool recognition to activate a non-ACTA transducers database; 79
Pset/Multistage; 253 selecting a non-ACTA transducer for the test; 82
Toolbar; 62 Troubleshooting guide; 365
ToolsNet; 323
settings; 325
ToolsTalk BLM; 55 U
connecting to STanalyser; 66 Unit of measure; 135; 196
LOG file; 75 USB port; 54
menu list; 61 connecting to STanalyser; 66
offline programming; 71 User interfaces; 50
overview; 60
registration; 59
settings; 65 V
software installation; 56
Versions; 22
software upgrade; 59
Vibration device
STanalyser LOG viewer; 74
STanalyser map; 64 enabling STanalyser vibration; 250
status bar; 63
system reuirements; 20

9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5 381 (383)


Index STanalyser User Guide

W Y
Weight; 18 Yield point
Window algorithm description; 229
menu list; 61; 62 production; 228
Work order; 268
configuring a work order; 272
Z
Zero torque adjustment; 87

382 (383) 9836 5228 01 Edition 4.5


STanalyser User Guide Index

9836 5228 01
2013-12
Edition 4.4

You might also like